The Orfeo ToolBox Cookbook, a guide

for non-developers
Updated for OTB-4.0

OTB Development Team

March 13, 2014

http://www.orfeo-toolbox.org
e-mail: [email protected]
The ORFEO Toolbox is not a black box.
Ch.D.
 Foreword

After almost 5 years of development, the Orfeo ToolBox has become a rich library used in many
remote sensing context, from research work to operational systems. The OTB Applications and
more recently the Monteverdi tool has helped to broaden the audience of the library, giving access
to its functionalities to non-developers.
Meanwhile, the OTB Software Guide has grown to more than 700 pages of documented code exam-
ples, which, combined with the class documentation with the Doxygen, allows developer users to
find their way through the Orfeo ToolBox so as to write code suiting their needs.
Yet, the documentation available for non-developers users, using Monteverdi and OTB Applica-
tions to perform everyday remote sensing tasks, has been almost inexistent for all these years, and
these users had to learn the software by themselves or ask for help from more experienced users.
This cookbook aims at fulfilling the need for an appropriate documentation of the applications built
upon the Orfeo ToolBox: Monteverdi, and OTB Applications, which are now integrated into the
main Orfeo ToolBox package and provide several access mode (command-line, QT interface, QGis
plugins, other languages . . . ).
A general introduction to these tools is first presented, along with installation instructions. Rather
than describing all modules and applications in an exhaustive way, we then decided to focus on very
common remote sensing tasks, detailing how they can be achieved with either Monteverdi or an
application.
For more information on the Orfeo ToolBox, please feel free to visit the Orfeo ToolBox website.
 CONTENTS

1 A brief tour of OTB-Applications 1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Windows XP/Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.4 OpenSuse 12.X and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Using the applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.1 Simplified use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.2 Using the command-line launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.3 Using the GUI launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.4 Using the Python interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.5 Load/Save OTB-Applications parameters from/to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2 A brief tour of Monteverdi 13

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.1 Windows XP/Seven/8.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2 MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
vi Contents

2.2.4 OpenSuse 11.X and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.3 Anatomy of the applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.1 What does it look like? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.2 Open an image with Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3.3 Visualize an image with Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3.4 Cache dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.3.5 Dynamic GUI definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3.6 Dynamic I/O definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4 Available modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.1 I/O operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Extract region of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Concatenate image bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Save dataset to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.2 Geometric process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Reprojection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Estimating sensor model based on ground control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.4.3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Optical calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SAR calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4.4 Filtering Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Band Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connected Component Segmentation module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Feature extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mean-shift segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.4.5 Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Supervised classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Non-supervised classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4.6 Specific SAR functionnalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Despeckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Compute intensity and log-intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Polarimetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Contents vii

3 A brief tour of Monteverdi2 35

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2.1 Windows XP/Seven/8.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.2 MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3 What does it look like? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4 Recipes 37
4.1 Using Pleiades images in OTB Applications and Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.1.1 Opening a Pleiades image in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1.2 Viewing a Pleiades image in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.1.3 Handling mega-tiles in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.1.4 Partial uncompressing of Pleiades images in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.1.5 Other processing of Pleiades images with Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1.6 Processing of Pleiades images with OTB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2 Optical pre-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2.1 Optical radiometric calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Optical calibration with OTB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Optical calibration with Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.2 Pan-sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pan-sharpening with OTB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pan-sharpening with Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.3 Digital Elevation Model management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.4 Ortho-rectification and map projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Ortho-rectification with OTB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2.5 Residual registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Extract metadata from the image reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Extract homologous points from images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Geometry refinement using homologous points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Orthorecrtify image using the affine geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3 Image processing and information extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
viii Contents

4.3.1 Simple calculus with channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.3.2 Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3.3 Large-Scale Mean-Shift (LSMS) segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Step 1: Mean-Shift Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Step 2: Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Step 3 (optional): Merging small regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Step 4: Vectorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3.4 Dempster Shafer based Classifier Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fuzzy Model (requisite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
First Step: Compute Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Second Step: Feature Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4.1 Pixel based classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Statistics estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Building the training data set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Performing the learning scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the classification model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Validating the classification model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fancy classification results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.2 Fusion of classification maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Majority voting for the fusion of classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Dempster Shafer framework for the fusion of classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Recommandations to properly use the fusion of classification maps . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.4.3 Majority voting based classification map regularization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Majority voting for the classification map regularization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Handling ambiguity and not classified pixels in the majority voting based regularization 71
Recommandations to properly use the majority voting based regularization . . . . . . 72
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5 Feature extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5.1 Local statistics extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Contents ix

4.5.2 Edge extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.5.3 Radiometric indices extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.5.4 Morphological features extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Binary morphological operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Gray scale morphological operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.5.5 Textural features extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Haralick texture features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SFS texture extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.6 Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.6.1 Estimate epipolar geometry transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.6.2 Resample images in epipolar geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.6.3 Disparity estimation: Block matching along epipolar lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.6.4 From disparity to Digital Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.6.5 One application to rule them all in multi stereo framework scheme . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.6.6 Stereo reconstruction good practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.6.7 Algorithm outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5 Applications Reference Documentation 91

5.1 Image Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.1.1 Color Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.1.2 Images Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
x Contents

See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.1.3 Image Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.1.4 Download or list SRTM tiles related to a set of images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.1.5 Extract ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.1.6 Multi Resolution Pyramid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.1.7 Quick Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Contents xi

Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.1.8 Read image information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.1.9 Rescale Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.1.10 Split Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.1.11 Image Tile Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2 Vector Data Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2.1 Concatenate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
xii Contents

Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.2.2 Rasterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.2.3 VectorData Extract ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.2.4 Vector Data reprojection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2.5 Vector data set field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.6 Vector Data Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contents xiii

5.3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

5.3.1 Optical calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.3.2 SAR Radiometric calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.4 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.4.1 Bundle to perfect sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.4.2 Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.4.3 Convert Sensor Point To Geographic Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
xiv Contents

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.4.4 Ply 3D files generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.4.5 Generate a RPC sensor model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.4.6 Grid Based Image Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.4.7 Image Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5.4.8 Ortho-rectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Contents xv

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.4.9 Pansharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.4.10 Refine Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.4.11 Image resampling with a rigid transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.4.12 Superimpose sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.5 Image Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
xvi Contents

5.5.1 Dimensionality reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.5.2 Mean Shift filtering (can be used as Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step
1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.5.3 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.6 Feature Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.6.1 Binary Morphological Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.6.2 Compute Polyline Feature From Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Contents xvii

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.6.3 Fuzzy Model estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.6.4 Edge Feature Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.6.5 Grayscale Morphological Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.6.6 Haralick Texture Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5.6.7 Homologous Points Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
xviii Contents

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5.6.8 Line segment detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.6.9 Local Statistic Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.6.10 Multivariate alteration detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
5.6.11 Radiometric Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Contents xix

Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.6.12 SFS Texture Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.6.13 Vector Data validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.7 Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.7.1 Pixel-wise Block-Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.7.2 Disparity map to elevation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
xx Contents

5.7.3 Fine Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.7.4 Stereo Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.7.5 Stereo-rectification deformation grid generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.8 Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.8.1 Classification Map Regularization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5.8.2 Confusion matrix Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Contents xxi

Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.8.3 Compute Images second order statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.8.4 Fusion of Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.8.5 Image Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.8.6 Unsupervised KMeans image classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.8.7 SOM Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
xxii Contents

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.8.8 Train a classifier from multiple images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.9 Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.9.1 Connected Component Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.9.2 Hoover compare segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.9.3 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Contents xxiii

5.9.4 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 3 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.9.5 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.9.6 Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.10 Miscellanous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.10.1 Band Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5.10.2 Images comparaison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
xxiv Contents

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.10.3 Hyperspectral data unmixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.10.4 Image to KMZ Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.10.5 Open Street Map layers importations applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
5.10.6 Obtain UTM Zone From Geo Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Contents xxv

5.10.7 Pixel Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.10.8 Vertex Component Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
 LIST OF FIGURES

1.1 GUI of the application Rescale, parameters tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.2 GUI of the application Rescale, logs tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 GUI of the application Rescale, progress tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 GUI of the application Rescale, parameters tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1 Monteverdi main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2 Monteverdi main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3 Monteverdi main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Vector Data visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5 Manage RGB composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.6 Manage the dynamic of each layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.7 Pixel description via index selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.8 Cache operation on the panchromatic image in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.9 Concatenation of multitemporal data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.10 Export dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11 Preview of the orthorectified imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.12 Band math module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.13 Difference of NDWI2 on 2 images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.14 Connected Component Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.15 Example Boats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
xxviii List of Figures

2.16 Example Boats result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.17 Mean-shift clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.18 SAR polarimetry conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.1 Monteverdi Pleiades image opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4.2 Pleiades dataset in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3 Pleiades image in Monteverdi viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.4 Handling Pleiades mega-tiles in Monteverdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.5 Monteverdi Pleiades uncompress module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.6 GUI of the optical calibration module based on the 6S model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.7 Output of the optical calibration module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.8 Input panchromatic and zoomed and registered multispectral image over it . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.9 Pan-sharpened image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.10 InputImagesRegistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.11 GUI of the vectorization module with data for classification chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.12 ExampleSVMClassif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.13 ExampleSVMClassifFusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.14 ExampleSVMClassifFusionMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.15 ExampleSVMClassifFusionDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.16 ExampleSVMClassifCMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.17 ExampleEpipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.18 ExampleEpipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.19 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

5.1 Parameters table for Color Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

5.2 Parameters table for Images Concatenation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.3 Parameters table for Image Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.4 Parameters table for Download or list SRTM tiles related to a set of images. . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.5 Parameters table for Extract ROI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.6 Parameters table for Multi Resolution Pyramid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.7 Parameters table for Quick Look. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.8 Parameters table for Read image information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
List of Figures xxix

5.9 Parameters table for Rescale Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5.10 Parameters table for Split Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.11 Parameters table for Image Tile Fusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.12 Parameters table for Concatenate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.13 Parameters table for Rasterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.14 Parameters table for VectorData Extract ROI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.15 Parameters table for Vector Data reprojection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.16 Parameters table for Vector data set field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.17 Parameters table for Vector Data Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.18 Parameters table for Optical calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.19 Parameters table for SAR Radiometric calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.20 Parameters table for Bundle to perfect sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.21 Parameters table for Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.22 Parameters table for Convert Sensor Point To Geographic Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.23 Parameters table for Ply 3D files generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.24 Parameters table for Generate a RPC sensor model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.25 Parameters table for Grid Based Image Resampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.26 Parameters table for Image Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.27 Parameters table for Ortho-rectification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
5.28 Parameters table for Pansharpening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.29 Parameters table for Refine Sensor Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.30 Parameters table for Image resampling with a rigid transform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.31 Parameters table for Superimpose sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.32 Parameters table for Dimensionality reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.33 Parameters table for Mean Shift filtering (can be used as Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift seg-
mentation, step 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.34 Parameters table for Smoothing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.35 Parameters table for Binary Morphological Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.36 Parameters table for Compute Polyline Feature From Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5.37 Parameters table for Fuzzy Model estimation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.38 Parameters table for Edge Feature Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.39 Parameters table for Grayscale Morphological Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
xxx List of Figures

5.40 Parameters table for Haralick Texture Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

5.41 Parameters table for Homologous Points Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5.42 Parameters table for Line segment detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5.43 Parameters table for Local Statistic Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.44 Parameters table for Multivariate alteration detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.45 Parameters table for Radiometric Indices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.46 Parameters table for SFS Texture Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.47 Parameters table for Vector Data validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.48 Parameters table for Pixel-wise Block-Matching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.49 Parameters table for Disparity map to elevation map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5.50 Parameters table for Fine Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.51 Parameters table for Stereo Framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.52 Parameters table for Stereo-rectification deformation grid generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.53 Parameters table for Classification Map Regularization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.54 Parameters table for Confusion matrix Computation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.55 Parameters table for Compute Images second order statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.56 Parameters table for Fusion of Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5.57 Parameters table for Image Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.58 Parameters table for Unsupervised KMeans image classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.59 Parameters table for SOM Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.60 Parameters table for Train a classifier from multiple images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.61 Parameters table for Connected Component Segmentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.62 Parameters table for Hoover compare segmentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.63 Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.64 Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 3 (optional). . . . . . . 274
5.65 Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.66 Parameters table for Segmentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.67 Parameters table for Band Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
5.68 Parameters table for Images comparaison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
5.69 Parameters table for Hyperspectral data unmixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.70 Parameters table for Image to KMZ Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
List of Figures xxxi

5.71 Parameters table for Open Street Map layers importations applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
5.72 Parameters table for Obtain UTM Zone From Geo Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
5.73 Parameters table for Pixel Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
5.74 Parameters table for Vertex Component Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
LIST OF TABLES
 CHAPTER

ONE

A brief tour of OTB-Applications

1.1 Introduction

OTB Applications was perhaps the older package of the Orfeo ToolBox suite after the OTB pack-
age itself. Since the Orfeo ToolBox is a library providing remote sensing functionalities, the only
applications that were distributed at the beginning were the examples from the Software Guide and
the tests. These applications are very useful for the developer because their code is very short and
only demonstrates one functionality at a time. In many cases, a real application would require :

• combining together two or more functions from the Orfeo ToolBox

• providing a nice high level interface to handle : parameters, input data, output data and com-
munication with the user

The OTB Applications package was originally designed to provide applications performing sim-
ple remote sensing tasks, more complex than simple examples from the Software Guide, and with a
more user-friendly interface (either graphical or command-line), to demonstrate the use of the Orfeo
ToolBox functions. The most popular applications are maybe the otbImageViewerManager, which
allows to open a collection of images and navigate in them, and the otbSupervisedClassificationAp-
plication, which allowed to delineate training regions of interest on the image and classify the image
with a SVM classifier trained with these regions (this application is no longer maintained since the
same functionnality is available through the corresponding Monteverdi module). During the first 3
years of the Orfeo ToolBox development, many more applications have been added to this package,
to perform various tasks. Most of them came with a graphical user interface, apart from some small
utilities that are command-line.
The development and release of the Monteverdi software (see chapter 2 at the end of year 2009
changed a lot of things for the OTB Applications package: most of non-developer users were
looking for quite a long time for an application providing Orfeo ToolBox functionalities under a
unified graphical interface. Many applications from the OTB Applications package were integrated
to Monteverdi as modules, and the OTB Applications package lost a lot of its usefulness. No more
2 Chapter 1. A brief tour of OTB-Applications

applications were added to the package and it was barely maintained, as new graphical tools were
directly embedded within Monteverdi.
Then, some people started to regain interest in the OTB Applications package. Monteverdi is a
great tool to perform numerous remote sensing and image processing task in a minute, but it is not
well adapted to heavier (and longer) processing, scripting and batch processing. Therefore, in 2010
the OTB Applications package has been revamped: old applications have been moved to a legacy
folder for backward compatibility, and the development team started to populate the package with
compact command-line tools to perform various heavy processing tasks.
Later on in 2011, the OTB Applications has been further revamped. Because of the increasing need
to interface the OTB Applications into other software and to provide auto-generated interfaces, the
Orfeo ToolBox development team decided to develop a new application framework. The main idea
of this framework is the following: each application is written once for all in a shared library (also
known as plugin). This plugin can be auto-loaded into appropriate tools wihtout recompiling, and is
able to fully describe its parameters, behaviour and documentation.
The tools to use the plugins can be extended, but Orfeo ToolBox shipped the following:

• A command-line laucher, which is almost equivalent to the former OTB Applications

command-line interface,
• A graphical launcher, with an auto-generated QT interface, providing ergonomic parameters
setting, display of documentation, and progress reporting,
• A SWIG interface, which means that any application can be loaded set-up and executed into
a high-level language such as Python or Java for instance.

Additionally, QGis plugins built on top of the SWIG/Python interface are available with seamless
integration within QGis. You can find a short guide about it here.
To facilitate the use of these tools and applications, they will now be shipped with the standard Orfeo
ToolBox package. It means that the former OTB-Applications package has entered its maintenance
cycle : no new feature will be pushed there, and all development is done directly inside the Orfeo
ToolBox paackage.
The OTB Applications are now rich of more than 40 tools, which are listed in the the applications
reference documentation, presented in chapter 5, page 91.

1.2 Installation

We provide different binary packages for OTB-Applications:

• for Windows platform (XP/Seven) through OsGeo4W installer (32/64bit)

• for Ubuntu 12.04 and higher
1.2. Installation 3

• for OpenSuse 12.X and higher

• for MacOSX through MacPorts software

If you want build from source or if we don’t provide packages for your system, some informations
are available into the OTB Software Guide, in the section (Building from Source)

1.2.1 Windows XP/Seven

Since version 3.12, we provide OTB Applications packages through OSGeo4W for Windows XP/-
Seven users:

• otb-bin for command line and QT applications

• otb-python for python applications

Follow the instructions in the installer and select the packages you want to add. The installer will
proceed with the installation of selected packages and all their dependencies. For the otb-bin pack-
ages, it will be available directly in the OSGeo4W shell, for example run

otbgui_BandMath.

For the otb-python packages, you can simply check from an OSGeo4W shell the list of available
applications:

python
import otbApplication
print str( otbApplication.Registry.GetAvailableApplications() )

1.2.2 MacOS X

OTB Applications are now available on MacPorts. The port name is called orfeotoolbox. You can
follow the MacPorts documentation to install MacPorts first, then install the orfeotoolbox port. After
the installation, you can used directly on your system, the OTB applications.

1.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher

For Ubuntu 12.04 and higher, OTB Applications packages may be available as Debian packages
through APT repositories:

• otb-bin for command line applications

4 Chapter 1. A brief tour of OTB-Applications

• otb-bin-qt for Qt applications

• python-otb for python applications

Since release 3.14.1, OTB Applications packages are available in the ubuntugis-unstable repository.
You can add it by using these command-lines:

sudo aptitude install add-apt-repository

sudo apt-add-repository ppa:ubuntugis/ubuntugis-unstable

After you can run:

sudo aptitude install otb-bin otb-bin-qt python-otb

If you are using Synaptic, you can add the repositories, update and install the packages through the
graphical interface.
For further informations about Ubuntu packages go to ubuntugis-unstable launchpad page and click
on Read about installing.
apt-add-repository will try to retrieve the GPG keys of the repositories to certify the origin of the
packages. If you are behind a http proxy, this step won’t work and apt-add-repository will stall and
eventually quit. You can temporarily ignore this error and proceed with the update step. Following
this, aptitude update will issue a warning about a signature problem. This warning won’t prevent
you from installing the packages.

1.2.4 OpenSuse 12.X and higher

For OpenSuse 12.X and higher, OTB Applications packages are available through zypper.
First, you need to add the appropriate repositories with these command-lines (please replace 11.4
by your OpenSuse version):

sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/games/openSUSE_11.4/ Games
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/Application:/Geo/openSUSE_11.4/ GEO
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/home:/tzotsos/openSUSE_11.4/ tzotsos

Now run:

sudo zypper refresh

sudo zypper install OrfeoToolbox
sudo zypper install OrfeoToolbox-python
1.3. Using the applications 5

Alternatively you can use the One-Click Installer from the openSUSE Download page or add the
above repositories and install through Yast Package Management.
There is also support for the recently introduced ’rolling’ openSUSE distribution named ’Tumble-
weed’. For Tumbleweed you need to add the following repositories with these command-lines:

sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/games/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ Games
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/Application:/Geo/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ GEO
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/home:/tzotsos/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ tzotsos

and then add the OTB packages as shown above.

1.3 Using the applications

Using the new OTB Applications framework is slightly more complex than launching a command-
line tool. This section describes all the ways to launch the new applications. Apart from the simpli-
fied access, which is similar to the former access to OTB Applications, you will need to know the
application name and optionally the path where the applications plugins are stored. For applications
shipped with Orfeo ToolBox, the name of each application can be found in chapter 5, page 91.

1.3.1 Simplified use

All standard applications delivered in with Orfeo ToolBox comes with simplified scripts in the
system path, allowing to launch the command-line and graphical user interface versions of the
application in the same simple way we used to launch the old applications. The command-line
interface is prefixed by otbcli_, while the Qt interface is prefixed by otbgui_. For instance, call-
ing otbcli_Convert will launch the command-line interface of the Convert application, while
otbgui_Convert will launch its GUI.
Passing arguments to the command-line version (prefixed by otbcli_) is explained in next sub-
section.

1.3.2 Using the command-line launcher

The command-line application launcher allows to load an application plugin, to set its parameters,
and execute it using the command line. Launching the otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine
without argument results in the following help to be displayed:
6 Chapter 1. A brief tour of OTB-Applications

$ otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine
Usage : ./otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine module_name [MODULEPATH] [arguments]

The module_name parameter corresponds to the application name. The [MODULEPATH] argument is
optional and allows to pass to the launcher a path where the shared library (or plugin) corresponding
to module_name is.
It is also possible to set this path with the environment variable ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH, making the
[MODULEPATH] optional. This variable is checked by default when no [MODULEPATH] argument is
given. When using multiple paths in ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH, one must make sure to use the standard
path separator of the target system, which is : on Unix, and ; on Windows.
An error in the application name (i.e. in parameter module_name) will make the
otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine lists the name of all applications found in the available
path (either [MODULEPATH] and/or ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH).
To ease the use of the applications, and try avoiding extensive environment customization, ready-to-
use scripts are provided by the OTB installation to launch each application, and takes care of adding
the standard application installation path to the ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH environment variable.
These scripts are named otbcli_<ApplicationName> and do not need any path set-
tings. For example you can start the Orthorectification application with the script called
otbcli_Orthorectification.
Launching an application with no or incomplete parameters will make the launcher display a sum-
mary of the parameters, indicating the mandatory parameters missing to allow for application exe-
cution. Here is an example with the OrthoRectification application:

$ otbcli_OrthoRectification

ERROR: Waiting for at least one parameter...

====================== HELP CONTEXT ======================

NAME: OrthoRectification
DESCRIPTION: This application allows to ortho-rectify optical images from supported sensors.

EXAMPLE OF USE:
otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500.tif -io.out QB_Toulouse_ortho.tif

DOCUMENTATION: http://www.orfeo-toolbox.org/Applications/OrthoRectification.html
======================= PARAMETERS =======================
-progress <boolean> Report progress
MISSING -io.in <string> Input Image
MISSING -io.out <string> [pixel] Output Image [pixel=uint8/int8/uint16/int16/uint32/int32/float/double]
-map <string> Output Map Projection [utm/lambert2/lambert93/transmercator/wgs/epsg]
MISSING -map.utm.zone <int32> Zone number
-map.utm.northhem <boolean> Northern Hemisphere
-map.transmercator.falseeasting <float> False easting
-map.transmercator.falsenorthing <float> False northing
-map.transmercator.scale <float> Scale factor
-map.epsg.code <int32> EPSG Code
-outputs.mode <string> Parameters estimation modes [auto/autosize/autospacing]
MISSING -outputs.ulx <float> Upper Left X
MISSING -outputs.uly <float> Upper Left Y
MISSING -outputs.sizex <int32> Size X
1.3. Using the applications 7

MISSING -outputs.sizey <int32> Size Y

MISSING -outputs.spacingx <float> Pixel Size X
MISSING -outputs.spacingy <float> Pixel Size Y
-outputs.isotropic <boolean> Force isotropic spacing by default
-elev.dem <string> DEM directory
-elev.geoid <string> Geoid File
-elev.default <float> Average Elevation
-interpolator <string> Interpolation [nn/linear/bco]
-interpolator.bco.radius <int32> Radius for bicubic interpolation
-opt.rpc <int32> RPC modeling (points per axis)
-opt.ram <int32> Available memory for processing (in MB)
-opt.gridspacing <float> Resampling grid spacing

For a detailed description of the application behaviour and parameters, please check the applica-
tion reference documentation presented chapter 5, page 91 or follow the DOCUMENTATION hyperlink
provided in otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine output. Parameters are passed to the appli-
cation using the parameter key (which might include one or several . character), prefixed by a -.
Command-line examples are provided in chapter 5, page 91.

1.3.3 Using the GUI launcher

The graphical interface for the applications provides a usefull interactive user interface to set the
parameters, choose files, and monitor the execution progress.
This interface can be activated through the CMake option OTB WRAP QT.
This launcher needs the same two arguments as the command line launcher :

$ otbApplicationLauncherQt module_name [MODULEPATH]

The application paths can be set with the ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH environment variable, as for the
command line launcher. Also, as for the command-line application, a more simple script is generated
and installed by OTB to ease the configuration of the module path : to launch the Rescale graphical
user interface, one will start the otbgui_Rescale script.
The resulting graphical application displays a window with several tabs:

• Parameters is where you set the parameters and execute the application.
• Logs is where you see the informations given by the application during its execution.
• Progress is where you see a progress bar of the execution (not available for all applications).
• Documentation is where you find a summary of the application documentation.

In this interface, every optional parameter has a check box that you have to tick if you want to set a
value and use this parameter. The mandatory parameters cannot be unchecked.
The interface of the application Rescale is shown here as an example.
8 Chapter 1. A brief tour of OTB-Applications

Figure 1.1: Parameters tab in Rescale application.

Figure 1.2: Logs tab in Rescale application.

1.3. Using the applications 9

Figure 1.3: Progress tab in Rescale application.

Figure 1.4: Parameters tab in Rescale application.

10 Chapter 1. A brief tour of OTB-Applications

1.3.4 Using the Python interface

The applications can also be accessed from Python, through a module named otbApplication
On Unix systems it is typically available in the /usr/lib/otb/python directory. You may need to
configure the environment variable PYTHONPATH to include this directory so that the module becomes
available from an Python shell.
On Windows, you can install the otb-python package, and the module will be available from an
OSGeo4W shell automatically.
In this module, two main classes can be manipulated :

• Registry, which provides access to the list of available applications, and can create applica-
tions

• Application, the base class for all applications. This allows to interact with an application
instance created by the Registry

As for the command line and GUI launchers, the path to the application modules needs to be prop-
erly set with the ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH environment variable. The standard location on Unix sys-
tems is /usr/lib/otb/applications. On Windows, the applications are available in the otb-bin
OSGeo4W package, and the environment is configured automatically so you don’t need to tweak
ITK_AUTOLOAD_PATH.
Here is one example of how to use Python to run the Smoothing application, changing the algorithm
at each iteration.
# Example on the use of the Smoothing application
#

# We will use sys.argv to retrieve arguments from the command line.

# Here, the script will accept an image file as first argument,
# and the basename of the output files, without extension.
from sys import argv

# The python module providing access to OTB applications is otbApplication

import otbApplication

# otbApplication.Registry can tell you what application are available

print " Available applications : "
print str ( otbApplication . Registry . GetAvailableApplications () )

# Let’s create the application with codename "Smoothing"

app = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Smoothing ")

# We print the keys of all its parameter

print app . GetParametersKeys ()

# First, we set the input image filename

app . SetParameterString (" in " , argv [1])

# The smoothing algorithm can be set with the "type" parameter key
# and can take 3 values : ’mean’, ’gaussian’, ’anidif’
for type in [ ’ mean ’, ’ gaussian ’, ’ anidif ’]:
1.3. Using the applications 11

print ’ Running with ’ + type + ’ smoothing type ’

# Here we configure the smoothing algorithm

app . SetParameterString (" type " , type )

# Set the output filename, using the algorithm to differenciate the outputs
app . SetParameterString (" out " , argv [2] + type + ". tif ")

# This will execute the application and save the output file
app . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

1.3.5 Load/Save OTB-Applications parameters from/to file

Since OTB 3.20, OTB applications parameters can be export/import to/from an XML file using
inxml/outxml parameters. Those parameters are available in all applications.
An example is worth a thousand words

otbcli_BandMath -il input_image_1 input_image_2

-exp "abs(im1b1 - im2b1)"
-out output_image
-outxml saved_applications_parameters.xml

Then, you can run the applications with the same parameters using the output xml file previously
saved. For this, you have to use the inxml parameter:

otbcli_BandMath -inxml saved_applications_parameters.xml

Note that you can also overload parameters from command line at the same time

otbcli_BandMath -inxml saved_applications_parameters.xml

-exp "(im1b1 - im2b1)"

In this cas it will use as mathematical expression ”(im1b1 - im2b1)” instead of ”abs(im1b1 -
im2b1)”.
Finally, you can also launch applications directly from the command-line launcher executable using
the inxml parameter without having to declare the application name. Use in this case:

otbApplicationLauncherCommandLine -inxml saved_applications_parameters.xml

It will retrieve the application name and related parameters from the input xml file and launch in this
case the BandMath applications.
 CHAPTER

TWO

A brief tour of Monteverdi

2.1 Introduction

The OTB Applications package makes available a set of simple software tools, which were designed
to demonstrate what can be done with Orfeo ToolBox. Many users started using these applications
for real processing tasks, so we tried to make them more generic, more robust and easy to use.
Orfeo ToolBox users have been asking for an integrated application for a while, since using several
applications for a complete processing (ortho-rectification, segmentation, classification, etc.) can be
a burden. Recently, the OTB team received a request from CNES’ Strategy and Programs Office in
order to provide an integrated application for capacity building activities (teaching, simple image
manipulation, etc.). The specifications included ease of integration of new processing modules.

2.2 Installation

The application is called Monteverdi, since this is the name of the Orfeo composer. The application
allows you to build interactivelly remote sensing processes based on the Orfeo ToolBox. This is
also in remembering of the great (and once open source) Khoros/Cantata software.
Installation of Monteverdi is very simple. Standard installer packages are available on the main
platforms thanks to OTB-Developpers and external users. These packages are available few days
after the release. Get the latest information on binary packages on the Orfeo ToolBox website in the
section download.
We will discribe in the following sections the way to install monteverdi on:

• Windows platform (XP/Seven)

• Ubuntu 12.04 and higher

• OpenSuse 12.X and higher

14 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

• MacOSX 10.8

If you want build from source or if we don’t provide packages for your system, some informations
are available into the OTB Software Guide, in the section (Building from Source)

2.2.1 Windows XP/Seven/8.1

For Windows XP/Seven/8.1 users, there is a classical standalone installation program for Mon-
teverdi, available from the OTB download page after each release.
Since version 1.12, it is also possible to get Monteverdi package through OSGeo4W for Windows
XP/Seven users. Package for Monteverdi is available directly in the OSGeo4W installer when you
select the otb-monteverdi package. Follow the instructions in the OSGeo4W installer and select
the otb-monteverdi. The installer will proceed with the installation of the package and all its de-
pendencies. Monteverdi will be directly installed in the OSGeo4W repository and a shortcut will be
added to your desktop and in the start menu (in the OSGeo4W folder). You can now use directly
Monteverdi from your desktop, from the start menu and from an OSGeo4W shell with command
monteverdi. Currently, you should use the 32bit OSGeo4W installer but we will soon distribute
monteverdi package for 64 bit installer.

2.2.2 MacOS X

A standard DMG package is available for Monteverdi for MacOS X 10.8. Please go the OTB
download page. Click on the file to launch Monteverdi. This DMG file is also compatible with
MacOSX 10.9.

2.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher

For Ubuntu 12.04 and higher, Monteverdi package may be available as Debian package through
APT repositories.
Since release 1.14, Monteverdi packages are available in the ubuntugis-unstable repository.
You can add it by using these command-lines:

sudo aptitude install add-apt-repository

sudo apt-add-repository ppa:ubuntugis/ubuntugis-unstable

Now run:

sudo aptitude install monteverdi

2.2. Installation 15

If you are using Synaptic, you can add the repository, update and install the package through the
graphical interface.
apt-add-repository will try to retrieve the GPG keys of the repositories to certify the origin of the
packages. If you are behind a http proxy, this step won’t work and apt-add-repository will stall and
eventually quit. You can temporarily ignore this error and proceed with the update step. Following
this, aptitude update will issue a warning about a signature problem. This warning won’t prevent
you from installing the packages.

2.2.4 OpenSuse 11.X and higher

For OpenSuse 12.X and higher, Monteverdi packages is available through zypper.
First, you need to add the appropriate repositories with these command-lines (please replace 11.4
by your OpenSuse version):

sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/games/openSUSE_11.4/ Games
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/Application:/Geo/openSUSE_11.4/ GEO
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/home:/tzotsos/openSUSE_11.4/ tzotsos

Now run:

sudo zypper refresh

sudo zypper install Monteverdi

Alternatively you can use the One-Click Installer from the openSUSE Download page or add the
above repositories and install through Yast Package Management.
There is also support for the recently introduced ’rolling’ openSUSE distribution named ’Tumble-
weed’. For Tumbleweed you need to add the following repositories with these command-lines:

sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/games/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ Games
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/Application:/Geo/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ GEO
sudo zypper ar
http://download.opensuse.org/repositories/home:/tzotsos/openSUSE_Tumbleweed/ tzotsos

and then add the monteverdi packages as shown above.

16 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.1: Monteverdi main window.

2.3 Anatomy of the applications

2.3.1 What does it look like?

This is Monteverdi’s main window (figure 2.1) where the menus are available and where you can
see the different modules, which have been set up for the processing. Input data are obtained by
readers. When you choose to use a new module, you select its input data, and therefore, you build
a processing pipeline sequentially. Figure 2.2 shows the generic window which allows to specify
output(s) of Monteverdi’s modules.
Let’s have a look at the different menus. The first one is of course the ”File” menu. This menu
allows you to open a data set, to save it and to cache it. The ”data set” concept is interesting, since
you don’t need to define by hand if you are looking for an image or a vector file. Of course, you
don’t need to do anything special for any particular file format. So opening a data set will create a
”reader” which will appear in the main window. At any time, you can use the ”save data set” option
2.3. Anatomy of the applications 17

Figure 2.2: Monteverdi inputs selection generic window.

in order to store to a file the result of any processing module.

2.3.2 Open an image with Monteverdi

The application allows to interactively select raster/vector dataset by browsing your computer. Mon-
teverdi takes advantage of the automatic detection of images’ extensions to indicate the dataset type
(optical, SAR or vector data).
The input dataset is added to the ”Data and Process” tree, which describes the dataset content and
each node corresponds to a layer.

2.3.3 Visualize an image with Monteverdi

This module allows to visualize raster or vector data. It allows to create RGB composition from
the input rasters. It is also possible to add vector dataset which are automatically reprojected in the
same projection of the input image or Digital Elevation informations.
The viewer offers three types of data visualisation:

• The Scroll window : to navigate quickly inside the entire scene

• The Full resolution window: the view of the region of interest selected in the scroll window
• The Zoom window
18 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.3: Monteverdi pixel description box.

Figure 2.4: Monteverdi pixel description box.

• The Pixel description: give access to dynamic informations on the current pixel pointed. In-
formations display are:
– The current index
– The pixel value
– The computed value (the dynamic of hte input image is modified to get a proper visual-
ization
– The coordinates of the current pixel (longitude and latitude)
– In case where there is a Internet connection available, Monteverdi displays the estimate
location of the current pixel (country + city)

The Visualization offers others great functionnalities which are available in the detached window. It
is for example possible to superpose vector dataset to the input image (see figure 2.4).
The ”Setup Tab” allows to modify the RGB composition or use the grayscale mode to display only
one layer.
2.3. Anatomy of the applications 19

Figure 2.5: Manage RGB composition.

Figure 2.6: Manage the dynamic.

The ”Histogram Tab” get access to the dynamic of the displayed layers. The basic idea is to convert
the output of the pixel representation to a RGB pixel for rendering on conventional displays. Values
are constrained to 0-255 with a transfer function and a clamping operation. By default, the dynamic
of each layer is modified by clamping the histogram at min + 2% and max − 2%.
There is also possible to select pixel coordinates and get access to all the informations available in
the “Pixel description Box”.

2.3.4 Cache dataset

The ”cache data set” (see figure 2.8) is a very interesting functionality. As you know, Orfeo Tool-
Box implements processing on demand, so when you build a processing pipeline, no processing
takes place unless you ask for it explicitly. That means that you can plug together the opening of a
data set, an orthorectification and a spleckle filter, for example, but nothing will really be computed
until you trigger the pipeline execution. This is very convenient, since you can quickly build a pro-
cessing pipeline and let it execute afterwards while you have a coffee. In Monteverdi, the process is
executed by saving the result of the last module of a pipeline. However, sometimes, you may want
to execute a part of the pipeline without having to set the file name to the obtained result. You can do
20 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.7: Index description via index selection.

Figure 2.8: Cached and streamed dataset.

this by caching a data set. That is, the result will be stored in a temporary file which will be created
in the ”Caching” directory created by the application. Another situation in which you may need to
cache a data set is when you need that the input of a module exists when you set its parameters.
This is nor a real requirement, since Monteverdi will generate the needed data by streaming it, but
this can be inefficient. This for instance about visualization of the result of a complex processing.
Using streaming for browsing through the result image means processing the visible part every time
you move inside the image. Caching the data before visualization will generate the whole data set
in advance allowing for a more swift display. All modules allow you to cache their input data sets.
2.4. Available modules 21

2.3.5 Dynamic GUI definition

The aim of Monteverdi is to provide a generic interface which is based on the definition of the
internal processes. In this frame, the way that you have to manage modules are identical during
the definition of a new process. Selecting a module on the upper main window, open automatically
the ”Inputs definition Window” wich allows to select data which are inputs of the current module.
Monteverdi module can manage single or multiple inputs and these inputs can be images on your
computer or results of previous module already registered in the ”Data and Process” tree.

2.3.6 Dynamic I/O definition

Management of image formats in Monteverdi works in the same manner as in the Orfeo Tool-
Box. The principle is that the software automatically recognize the image format. Communication
between modules follow also the same principle and the Input definition of modules request to all
available outputs of the same type in the ”Data and process” tree. Internally, all the treatments
in Monteverdi are computed in float precision by default. It is also possible to switch to double
precision by compiling the application from source and set the CMAKE option compile float to ON.

2.4 Available modules

2.4.1 I/O operations

Extract region of interest

It allows to extract regions of interest (ROI) from an image. There are two ways to select the region:

• By indicating the X and Y coordinatres of the upper-left coordinates and the X-Y size of the
regions.
• By interactivelly selecting the region of interest in the input image.

Concatenate image bands

With Monteverdi, you could generate a large scale of value added informations from lots of inputs
data. One of the basic functionnality is to be able to superpose result’s layers into the same dataset.
Concatenating images into one single multiple-bands image (they need to have the same size), and
to be able to create for example RGB composition with the inputs layer.
22 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.9: Concatenation module.

Save dataset to file

Monteverdi allows to export raster or vector dataset to a file to your system. In the case of raster
images, it is possible to cast output pixel type. In Monteverdi all the processes are done in floating
point precision. On large remote sensing dataset, saving your result in float data type could lead
to file too large(more than 25 Go for pan-sharpened 8 bands WorldView2 with a resolution of 46
centimeters). Since the module allows to cast pixels in other types :

• unsigned char (8 bits)

• short (16 bits)
• int (32 bits)
• float (32 bits)
• double (64 bits)
• unsigned short (16 bits)
• unsigned int (32 bits)

2.4.2 Geometric process

In the frame of remote sensing process, one common operation is to be able to superpose and manip-
ulate data which come from different sources. This section gives access to a large set of geometric
2.4. Available modules 23

Figure 2.10: Save dataset module.

operations. It performs re-projection and orthorectification operations on Optical or SAR dataset

using the available sensor models (image informations available in the meta-data are automatically
read by the application).

Reprojection module

The application is derived from the otbOrthorectificationApplication in the OTB Applications pack-
age and allow to produce orthorectified imagery from level 1 product. The application is able to parse
metadata informations and set default parameters. The application contains 4 tabs:

• Coordinates: Define the center or upper-left pixel coordinates of the orthorectified image (the
longitude and latitude coordinates are calculated through meta-data informations. It is also
possible to specify the map projection of the output.
• Output image: The module allows to only orthorectified a Region Of interest inside the input
dataset. This tab allows to set the size of the ROI around the center pixel coordinate or from
the upper left index. The orthorectified imagery can also be resampled at any resolution in the
line or column directions by setting the ”Spacing X” and the ”Spacing Y” respectively, and
choosing interpolation method.
• DEM: Indicate path to a directory containing SRTM elevation file. The application is able to
detect inside the direcory which DEM files are relevant in the process. You can find detailed
informations on how to get a usable DEM
• Image extent: Compare the initial image extension with the preview the orthorectified result.
This preview is automatically updated if the user change the ”Size X” or ”Size Y” values in
the ”Output Image” tab.
24 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.11: Reprojection module. Quick Look tab.

2.4. Available modules 25

Estimating sensor model based on ground control points

This module allows to take ground control points on a raster image where no geographic informa-
tions are available. This GCPs list is making correspondence between pixel coordinate in the input
image and physical coordinates. The list allows to derive a general function which convert any
pixel coordinates in physical positions. This function is based on a RPC transformation (Rational
Polynomial Coefficients). As a consequence, the module enriches the output image with metadata
informations defining a RPC sensor model associated with the input raster. There are several ways
to generate the GCPs:

• With Internet access: dynamically generate the correspondance on the input image and Open
Street Map layers.
• Without Internet access: Set manually Ground control points : indicate index position and
cartographic coordinates in the input image.

It is also possible to import/export the list of Ground Control points from/to an XML file.
Moreover, if the input image has GCPs in its metadata, the module allows to add or remove points
from the existing list, which is automatically loaded.

2.4.3 Calibration

In the solar spectrum, sensors on Earth remote sensing satellites measure the radiance reflected by
the atmosphere-Earth surface system illuminated by the sun. This signal depends on the surface
reflectance, but it is also perturbed by two atmospheric processes, the gaseous absorption and the
scattering by molecules and aerosols.

Optical calibration

In the case of the Optical calibration, the basic idea is to be able to retrieve reflectance of the observed
physical objects. The process can be split in 3 main steps:

• Derived luminance from the raw value in the input image.

• Convert the luminance to reflectance to produce the TOA image(Top Of Atmosphere).

• Inverse a radiative transfer code, which simulates the reflection of solar radiation by a coupled
atmosphere-surface system. This step produce the TOC (Top of Canopy) imagery, which is
the final result of the optical calibration module.
26 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

SAR calibration

The calibration and validation of the measurement systems are important to maintain the reliability
and reproducibility of the SAR measurements, but the establishment of correspondence between
quantities measured by SAR and physical measure requires scientific background. The SAR cali-
bration module allows to estimate quantitative accuracy. For now only calibration of TerraSARX
data is available.

2.4.4 Filtering Operations

Band Math

The Band Math module allows to perform complex mathematical operations over images. It is
based on the mathematical parser library muParser and comes with a bunch of build-in functions
and operators (listed here). This home-brewed digital calculator is also bundled with custom func-
tions allowing to compute a full expression result simply and really quickly, since the filter supports
streaming and multi-threading. The Monteverdi module provides an intuitive way to easily per-
form complex band computation. The module also prevents error in the mathematical command by
checking the expression as the user types it, and notifying information on the detected error:
Figure 2.12 presents an example on how the band math can produce a threshold image on the NDVI
value computed in one pass using built-in conditional operator “if” available in the parser.
An other operational example, on how this simple module can produce reliable information. Figure
2.13 shows the result of the subtraction of the Water indice on 2 images which was taken before and
during the crisis event. The difference was produced by the band math module and allows to get a
reliable estimation of the flood events.

Figure 2.12: Conditional operators using the band math module (on the left) to process a NDVI image threshold
and the resulting image (on the right).

Connected Component Segmentation module

The Connected Component Segmentation module allows segmentation and object analysis using
user defined criteria at each step. This module uses muParser library using the the same scheme as
2.4. Available modules 27

Figure 2.13: Subtraction of NDWI2.

it is done in Band math module (see 2.4.4 for a detailled explanation). It relies on three main steps
process :

Mask definition : This mask is used as support of Connected Component segmentation (CC) . i.e
zeros pixels are not taken into account by CC algorithm. Binarization criteria is defined by
user, via muparser. This step is optional, if no Mask is given, entire image is processed. The
following example creates a mask using intensity (mean of pixel values) parameter :

intensity > 200

Segmentation : Connected Component Segmentation driven by user defined criteria. Segmentation

process can be followed by a small object rejection step. The following example use distance
(pixel intensity value difference ) parameter to define acception/rejection criteria between two
adjacents pixels :

distance < 10

Object analysis post processing : This step consists in post processing on each detected area using
shape and statistical object characterization. The following example use elongation parameter
to test labeled objects :

SHAPE_elongation > 2
28 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

A detailled presentation of parameters and variables, can be found on the wiki.

Results are then exported in shape file format. Graphical user interface is presented on Figure 2.14.
At each step intemerdiate output can be seen using Display item list. Viewing windows are updated
by clicking on Update button. Available display outputs are :

Input image : input image.

Mask Output : mask image created using formula.

Masked Image : input image multiplied by mask image.
Segmentation Output : output of Connected Component segmentation filter.

Segmentation after small object rejection : output of Connected Component segmentation after
relabeling and small object rejection.
Filter Output : final output after object based analysis opening post processing.

Available variables for each expression can be found using item list variables names. available
functions can be found in help windows by clicking on Help button. The module also prevents error
in the mathematical command by checking the expression as the user types it. Background value
is set to green if formula is right, in red otherwise. If mask expression is left blank entire image is
processed. If Object Analysis expression is left blank the whole set of label objects is considered.
After segmentation step, too small objects can be rejected using Object min area input. Eliminating
too small objects at this step is needed to lighten further computation. min area is the pixel size of
the label object.
When a first pass have been done, Specific label object properties can be displayed. Select the
”Filter Output” visualization mode, Update the visualization. Then use right click on selected object
in image to display object properties.
Clicking on Save and Quit button export output to Monteverdi in vector data format.
A detailled presentation of this module, and examples can be found on the wiki.
A boat detection example is presented on Figure 2.15. Results can be seen on Figure 2.16.

Feature extraction

Under the term Feature Extraction, it include several techniques aiming to detect or extract infor-
mations of low level of abstraction from images. These features can be objects : points, lines,
etc.They can also be measures : moments, textures, etc.
2.4. Available modules 29

Figure 2.14: connected component segmentation module.

30 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Figure 2.15: Connected Component Segmentation module example : boat detection.

Figure 2.16: Boat detection example results.

2.4. Available modules 31

Figure 2.17: Mean-shift module.

Mean-shift segmentation

For a given pixel, the Mean-shift algorithm will build a set of neighboring pixels within a given
spatial radius and a color range. The spatial and color center of this set is then computed and the
algorithm iterates with this new spatial and color center. The Mean-shift can be used for edge-
preserving smoothing, or for clustering.

2.4.5 Learning

Supervised classification

Supervised classification is a procedure in which individual items are placed into groups based on
quantitative information on one or more characteristics inherent in the items and based on a training
set of previously labeled items.
The supervised classification module is based on the Support Vector Machine method which consists
in searching for the separating surface between 2 classes by the determination of the subset of
training samples which best describes the boundary between the 2 classes. This method can be
extended to be able to classify more than 2 classes.
The module allows to interactivelly describe learnings samples which corresponds to polygons sam-
ples on the input images.
Then a SVM model is derived from this learning sample which allows to classify each pixel of the
input image in one of the defined class.
32 Chapter 2. A brief tour of Monteverdi

Non-supervised classification

The non supervised classification module is based on the Kmeans algorithm. The GUI allows to
modify parameters of the algorithm and produce a label image.

2.4.6 Specific SAR functionnalities

This section give access to specific treatments related to the SAR (Synthetic Aperture Radar) func-
tionnalities.

Despeckle

SAR images are generally corrupted by speckle noise. To suppress speckle and improve the radar
image interpretability lots of filtering techniques have been proposed. The module implements to
well-known despeckle methods: Frost and Lee.

Compute intensity and log-intensity

Compute the derived intensity and log-intensity from the input SAR imagery.

Polarimetry

In conventional imaging radar the measurement is a scalar which is proportional to the received
backscattered power at a particular combination of linear polarization (HH, HV, VH or VV). Po-
larimetry is the measurement and interpretation of the polarization of this measurement which allows
to measure various optical properties of a material. In polarimetry the basic measurement is a 2x2
complex scattering matrix yielding an eight dimensional measurement space (Sinclair matrix). For
reciprocal targets where HV = V H, this space is compressed to five dimensions: three amplitudes
(|HH|, |HV |, and |VV |); and two phase measurements, (co-pol: HH-VV, and cross-pol: HH-HV).
(see grss-ieee).

Synthesis Allow to construct an image that would be received from a polarimetric radar having
selected transmit and receive polarizations. The Synthesis module waits for real and imaginary part
(real images) of the HH, VV, VH and HV images. The reciprocal case where case V H = HV , is not
properly handled yet, for now the user has to set the same input for the two HV and VH.

Conversion As we saw in the previous main section, the basic measurement is a 2x2 complex
scattering matrix yielding an eight dimensional measurement space. But other measurements exist:
2.4. Available modules 33

Figure 2.18: SAR polarimetry conversion module.

• covariance matrix and with its reciprocal specific case

• coherency matrix and with its reciprocal specific case
• circular coherency matrix and with its reciprocal specific case
• Mueller matrix and with its reciprocal specific case...

Modules in the Conversion subsection allow to proceed these conversions between matrix represen-
tations. Allowed conversion and input images types are described in the following figure 2.18.

Analysis This module allows to perform some of classical polarimetric analysis methods. It allows
to compute:

• The polarimetric synthesis:

– input: 4 bands complex image
– output: mono channel real image
– parameters: the synthesis parameters (incident and reflected ψ and χ angles)
• The reciprocal H alpha image:
– input: 6 bands complex image
– output: 3 bands real image
 CHAPTER

THREE

A brief tour of Monteverdi2

3.1 Introduction

Monteverdi was developed 4 years ago in order to provide an integrated application for capacity
building activities (teaching, simple image manipulation, etc.). Its success went far beyond this
initial scope since it opened the OTB world to a wide range of users who needed a ready to use
graphical tool more than a library of components to write their own processing chain. With this 4
years of lifetime, we have a lot of feedbacks regarding how useful the tool was, but also regarding
what should be improved to move toward greater usability and operationnality. We therefore decided
to rework the Monteverdi concept into a brand new software, enlightened by this experience.
Monteverdi2 offers a new interface based on Qt and a set of processing capibilities base on OTB-
Applications.

3.2 Installation

Installation of Monteverdi2 is very simple. Standard installer packages are available on the main
platforms thanks to OTB-Developpers and external users. These packages are available few days
after the release. Get the latest information on binary packages on the Orfeo ToolBox website in the
section download.
We will discribe in the following sections the way to install Monteverdi2 on:

• Windows platform (XP/Seven/8.1)

• Ubuntu 12.04 and higher
• MacOSX 10.8

If you want build from source or if we don’t provide packages for your system, some informations
are available into the OTB Software Guide, in the section (Building from Source)
36 Chapter 3. A brief tour of Monteverdi2

3.2.1 Windows XP/Seven/8.1

For Windows XP/Seven/8.1 users, there is a classical standalone installation program for Mon-
teverdi2, available from the OTB download page after each release of Monteverdi2.

3.2.2 MacOS X

A standard DMG package is available for Monteverdi2 for MacOS X 10.8. Please go the OTB
download page. Click on the file to launch Monteverdi2. We will provide in the next release a
package for MacOSX 10.9.

3.2.3 Ubuntu 12.04 and higher

For Ubuntu 12.04 and higher, Monteverdi2 package may be available as Debian package through
APT repositories.
Since release 0.2, Monteverdi2 packages are available in the ubuntugis-unstable repository.
You can add it by using these command-lines:

sudo aptitude install add-apt-repository

sudo apt-add-repository ppa:ubuntugis/ubuntugis-unstable

Now run:

sudo aptitude install monteverdi2

If you are using Synaptic, you can add the repository, update and install the package through the
graphical interface.
apt-add-repository will try to retrieve the GPG keys of the repositories to certify the origin of the
packages. If you are behind a http proxy, this step won’t work and apt-add-repository will stall and
eventually quit. You can temporarily ignore this error and proceed with the update step. Following
this, aptitude update will issue a warning about a signature problem. This warning won’t prevent
you from installing the packages.

3.3 What does it look like?

You can find more information about Monteverdi2 into the post of the OTB blog at http://blog.
orfeo-toolbox.org/.
 CHAPTER

FOUR

Recipes

This chapter presents guideline to perform various remote sensing and image processing tasks with
either OTB Applications, Monteverdi or both. Its goal is not to be exhaustive, but rather to help
the non-developper user to get familiar with these two packages, so that he can use and explore them
for his future needs.
38 Chapter 4. Recipes

4.1 Using Pleiades images in OTB Applications and Monteverdi

The typical Pleiades product is a pansharpened image of 40 000 by 40 000 pixels large, with 4
spectral bands, but one can even order larger mosaics, whose size can be even larger, with hundreds
of thousands of pixels in each dimension.
To allow easier storage and transfer of such products, the standard image file format is Jpeg2000,
which allows to achieve high compression rates. The counterpart of these better storage and transfer
performances is that the performance of pixels accesses within those images may be poorer than
with an image format without compression, and even more important, the cost of accessing pixels is
not uniform: it depends on where are the pixels you are trying to access, and how they are spatially
arranged.
To be more specific, Pleiades images are internally encoded into 2048 per 2048 pixels tiles (within
the Jpeg2000 file). These tiles represent the atomic decompression unit: if you need a single pixel
from a given tile, you still have to decode the whole tile to get it. As a result, if you plan to access a
large amount of pixels within the image, you should try to access them on a per tile basis, because
anytime you ask for a given tile more than once, the performances of your processing chains drop.
What does it mean? In Orfeo ToolBox, the streaming (on the flow) pipeline execution will try to stay
synchronised with the input image tiling scheme to avoid decoding the same tile several time. But
you may know that in the Orfeo ToolBox world, one can easily chain numerous processing, some
them enlarging the requested region to process the output - like neighbourhood based operators
for instance - or even completely change the image geometry - like ortho-rectification for instance.
And this chaining freedom is also at the heart of Monteverdi. In short, it is very easy to build a
processing pipeline in Orfeo ToolBox or chain of modules in Monteverdi that will get incredibly
bad performances, even if the Orfeo ToolBox back-end does its best to stay in tune with tiles. And
here, we do not even speak of sub-sampling the whole dataset at some point in the pipeline, which
will lead to even more incredibly poor performances, and is however done anytime a viewer is called
on a module output in Monteverdi.
So, can Monteverdi or OTB Applications open and process Pleiades images? Fortunately yes.
Monteverdi even takes advantage of Jpeg2000 ability to generate coarser scale images for quick-
look generation for visualisation purposes. But to ease the use of Pleiades images in Monteverdi,
we chose to open them in a separate data type, and to lock the use of most of modules for this data
type. It can only be used in the Viewer module and a dedicated module allowing to uncompress a
user-defined part of a Pleiades image to disk. One can still force the data type during the opening
of the image, but this is not advised: the advised way to use the other modules with Pleiades data
is to first uncompress to disk your area of interest, and then open it again in Monteverdi (careful,
you may need a lot of disk space to do this). As for the applications, they will work fine even on
Jpeg2000 Pleiades data, but keep in mind that a performance sink might show depending on the
processing you are try to achieve. Again, the advised way of working would be to uncompress your
area of interest first and then work with the uncompressed file, as you used to with other data.
A final word about metadata: OTB Applications and Monteverdi can read the Dimap V2 (note that
we also read the less non-official Dimap V1.1 format) metadata file associated with the Jpeg2000
4.1. Using Pleiades images in OTB Applications and Monteverdi 39

Figure 4.1: Dialog window when opening a Pleiades image in Monteverdi

Figure 4.2: Pleiades images in the main Monteverdi window

file in the Pleiades product. It reads the RPC localisation model for geo-coding and the information
needed to perform radiometric calibration. These metadata will be written in an associated geom-
etry file (with a .geom extension) when uncompressing your area of interest to disk, so that both
Monteverdi and OTB Applications will be able to retrieve them, even for images extracts.

4.1.1 Opening a Pleiades image in Monteverdi

Opening a Pleiades image in Monteverdi is not different from opening other kind of dataset: use
the Open Dataset item from the File menu, and select the JP2 file corresponding to you image using
the file browser.
Figure 4.1, page 39 shows the dialog box when opening a Pleiades image in Monteverdi. One can
see some changes with respect to the classical dialog box for images opening.
The first novelty is a combo box allowing to choose the resolution of the Jpeg2000 file one wants to
decode. As said in the introduction of this section, Orfeo ToolBox can take advantage of Jpeg2000
capability to access coarser resolution ver efficiently. If you select for instance the Resolution: 1
item, you will end with an image half the size of the original image with pixels twice as big. For
40 Chapter 4. Recipes

instance, on a Pleiades panchromatic or pansharpened product, the Resolution: 0 image has a ground
samping distance of 0.5 meters while the Resolution: 1 image has a ground samping distance of one
meter. For a multispectral product, the Resolution: 0 image has a ground samping distance of 2
meters while the Resolution: 1 image has a ground samping distance of 4 meters.
The second novelty is a check-box called Save quicklook for future re-use. This option allows to
speed-up the loading of a Pleiades image within Monteverdi. In fact, when loading a Pleiades
image, Monteverdi generates a quicklook of this image to be used as a minimap in the Viewer
Module as well as in the Uncompress Jpeg2000 image module. This quicklook is the coarser level
of resolution from the Jpeg2000 file: it should decode easily, but can still take a while. This is why
if the check-box is checked, Monteverdi will write this quicklook in uncompressed Tiff format next
to the Jpeg2000 file. For instance, if the file name is:

IMG_PHR1A_MS_201204011017343_SEN_IPU_20120529_1596-002_R1C1.JP2

Monteverdi will write, if it can, the following files in the same directory:

IMG_PHR1A_MS_201204011017343_SEN_IPU_20120529_1596-002_R1C1.JP2_ql_by_otb.tif
IMG_PHR1A_MS_201204011017343_SEN_IPU_20120529_1596-002_R1C1.JP2_ql_by_otb.geom

Next time one will try to open this image in Monteverdi, the application will find these files and
load directly the quicklook from them, instead of decoding it from the Jpeg2000 file, resulting in an
instant loading of the image in Monteverdi. Since the wheight of these extra files is ususally of a
few megaoctets, it is recommended to keep this option checked unless one has a very good reason
not to. Now that the Pleiades image is loaded in Monteverdi, it appears in the main Monteverdi
window, as shown in figure 4.2, page 39.

4.1.2 Viewing a Pleiades image in Monteverdi

You can open the Pleiades image in the viewer, either by using the contextual menu or by opening
the Viewer Module through the menu bar.
You can notice that the viewer opens quickly without showing the traditional progress bar. This is
because Monteverdi already loaded the quick-look upon opening, and we do not need to re-compute
it each time the image is opened in the Viewer Module.
Figure 4.3, page 41 shows a Pleiades image displayed in the Viewer Module. One can notice that
the navigation experience is rather smooth. If you navigate using arrows keys, you will notice that
latency can occur now and then: this is due to the viewport switching to a new Jpeg2000 tile to
decode. On can also observe that the latitude and longitude of the pixel under the mouse pointer is
displayed, which means that the sensor modelling is handled (if you have an internet connection,
you may even see the actual name of the place under mouse pointer). Last, as said in the foreword of
this section, Pleiades image can be quite large, so it might be convenient to switch the viewer style
from Packed to Splitted, in which case you will be able to maximize the Scroll Window for better
localisation of the viewed area. To do so, one can go to the Setup tab of the Viewer Control Window.
4.1. Using Pleiades images in OTB Applications and Monteverdi 41

Figure 4.3: A Pleiades image displayed in Monteverdi viewer.

c CNES 2012

Figure 4.4: Pleiades mega-tiles and output mosaic in Monteverdi

4.1.3 Handling mega-tiles in Monteverdi

If the Pleiades product is very large, it might happen that the image is actually splitted into several
Jpeg2000 files, also called mega-tiles. Since the area of interest might span two or more mega-tiles,
it is convenient to stitch together these tiles so as to get the entire scene into one Monteverdi dataset.
To do so, one must first open all mega-tiles in Monteverdi, as described in section 4.1.1, page 39.
Once all mega-tiles are opened as shown in figure 4.4, page 41.
Once this is done, one can use the Mosaic Images module from the File menu. Simply append all
mega-tiles into the module and run it: the module will look for the RiC j pattern to determine the
mega-tiles layout, and will also check for consistency, e.g. missing tiles or mega-tiles size mismatch.
Upon success, it generates a new Pleiades image dataset, which corresponding to the entire scene,
as shown in figure 4.4, page 41. One can then use this dataset as a regular Pleiades dataset.
42 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.5: A Pleiades image in Monteverdi Uncompress Jpeg2000 image module.

c CNES 2012

4.1.4 Partial uncompressing of Pleiades images in Monteverdi

The next very important thing one can do with Monteverdi is to select an area of interest in the
Pleiades image so as to uncompress it to disk. To do so, open the Pleiades dataset into the Uncom-
press Jpeg2000 image module from the File menu. Figure 4.5, page 42 shows what this module
looks like. On the left, one can find informations about the images: dimensions, resolution level,
and number of Jpeg2000 tiles in image, dimension of tiles, and size of tiles in mega-octets. The
center part of the module is the most important one: it displays a quick-look of the Pleiades image.
On this quick-look, one can select the area to be decoded by drawing a rectangle with the mouse.
The red rectangle shown by the module corresponds to this user-defined area. On the left, in red,
one can find the start index and size of corresponding region.
The module also displays a green rectangle, which shows the minimum set of tiles to be decoded to
decode the red area: this is the region that will actually be decoded to disk. On the left, in green,
one can find information about this region: how many tiles it contains, and what will be the size of
the corresponding decoded output file.
Once one chose her area of interest, one can click on the Save button, and select an output file. The
module will write a geometry file (with the .geom extension) with all useful metadata in it, so that
when reading back the file in Monteverdi or in OTB Applications, geometry and radiometry based
functionalities can still be used.
4.2. Optical pre-processing 43

4.1.5 Other processing of Pleiades images with Monteverdi

For all the reasons exposed in the foreword of this section, we do not allow to use directly Pleiades
images in the remaining of Monteverdi modules: the advised way of doing so is to first uncompress
the area of interest to disk.

4.1.6 Processing of Pleiades images with OTB Applications

The OTB Applications are able to work directly with Pleiades images. However, keep in mind that
performances may be limited due to the reasons exposed in the foreword of this section. If you
experiment poor performances with some application, try to uncompress the area of interest from
your image with Monteverdi first. One can also use the ExtractROI application for this purpose.
One thing that is interesting to know is that one can access the coarser resolution of the Jpeg2000
file by appending : i to the filename, where i is the resolution level starting at 0. For instance, one
can use the following:

otbcli_ExtractROI -in IMG_PHR1A_PMS_201201151100183_SEN_IPU_20120222_0901-001_R2C1.JP2:5 -out test.tif uint16

4.2 Optical pre-processing

This section presents various pre-processing tasks that are presented in a classical order to obtain a
calibrated, pan-sharpened image.

4.2.1 Optical radiometric calibration

In remote sensing imagery, pixel values are called DN (for Digital Numbers) and can not be phys-
ically interpreted and compared: they are influenced by various factors such as the amount of light
flowing trough the sensor, the gain of the detectors and the analogic to numeric converter.
Depending on the season, the light and atmospheric conditions, the position of the sun or the sensor
internal parameters, these DN can drastically change for a given pixel (apart from any ground change
effects). Moreover, these effects are not uniform over the spectrum: for instance aerosol amount and
type has usually more impact on the blue channel.
Therefore, it is necessary to calibrate the pixel values before any physical interpretation is made
out of them. In particular, this processing is mandatory before any comparison of pixel spectrum
between several images (from the same sensor), and to train a classifier without dependence to the
atmospheric conditions at the acquisition time.
Calibrated values are called surface reflectivity, which is a ratio denoting the fraction of light that is
reflected by the underlying surface in the given spectral range. As such, its values lie in the range
44 Chapter 4. Recipes

[0, 1]. For convenience, images are often stored in thousandth of reflectivity, so that they can be
encoded with an integer type. Two levels of calibration are usually distinguished:

• The first level is called Top Of Atmosphere (TOA) reflectivity. It takes into account the sensor
gain, sensor spectral response and the solar illumination.
• The second level is called Top Of Canopy (TOC) reflectivity. In addition to sensor gain and so-
lar illumination, it takes into account the optical thickness of the atmosphere, the atmospheric
pressure, the water vapor amount, the ozone amount, as well as the composition and amount
of aerosol gasses.

This transformation can be done either with OTB Applications or with Monteverdi. Sensor-related
parameters such as gain, date, spectral sensitivity and sensor position are seamlessly read from the
image metadata. Atmospheric parameters can be tuned by the user. Supported sensors are :

• Pleiades,
• SPOT5,
• QuickBird,

• Ikonos,
• WorldView-1,
• WorldView-2,

• Formosat.

Optical calibration with OTB Applications

The OpticalCalibration application allows to perform optical calibration. The mandatory parameters
are the input and output images. All other parameters are optional. By default the level of calibration
is set to TOA (Top Of Atmosphere). The output images are expressed in thousandth of reflectivity
using a 16 bits unsigned integer type.
A basic TOA calibration task can be performed with the following command :

otbcli_OpticalCalibration -in input_image -out output_image

A basic TOC calibration task can be performed with the following command :

otbcli_OpticalCalibration -in input_image -out output_image -level toc

4.2. Optical pre-processing 45

Figure 4.6: Optical calibration module.

Optical calibration with Monteverdi

These transformations can also be done in Monteverdi.

The 6S model needs atmospheric parameters to be able to compute radiative terms to estimate the
atmospheric contributions on the input signal. Default parameters are available in the module. For
atmospheric parameters, it is possible to indicate AERONET file. The AERONET (AErosol RObotic
NETwork) program is a federation of ground-based remote sensing aerosol networks established by
NASA and PHOTONS (Univ. of Lille 1, CNES, and CNRS-INSU) and is greatly expanded by
collaborators from national agencies, institutes, universities, individual scientists, and partners. The
program provides accessible public domain database of aerosol optical, mircrophysical and radiative
properties.
The module produces four outputs:

• Luminance image.
• TOA reflectance image.
• TOC reflectance image.
• Difference TOA-TOC image, which allows to get the estimation of atmospheric contribution.

4.2.2 Pan-sharpening

Because of physical constrains on the sensor design, it is difficult to achieve high spatial and spectral
resolution at the same time : a better spatial resolution means a smaller detector, which in turns
46 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.7: Optical calibration module’s outputs.

means lesser optical flow on the detector surface. On the contrary, spectral bands are obtained
through filters applied on the detector surface, that lowers the optical flow, so that it is necessary to
increase the detector size to achieve an acceptable signal to noise ratio.
For these reasons, many high resolution satellite payload are composed of two sets of detectors,
which in turns delivers two different kind of images :

• The multi-spectral (XS) image, composed of 3 to 8 spectral bands containing usually blue,
green, red and near infra-red bands at a given resolution (usually from 2.8 meters to 2 meters).
• The panchromatic (PAN) image, which is a grayscale image acquired by a detector covering a
wider part of the light spectrum, which allows to increase the optical flow and thus to reduce
pixel size. Therefore, resolution of the panchromatic image is usually around 4 times lower
than the resolution of the multi-spectral image (from 46 centimeters to 70 centimeters).

It is very frequent that those two images are delivered side by side by data providers. Such a dataset
is called a bundle. A very common remote sensing processing is to fuse the panchromatic image with
the multi-spectral one so as to get an image combining the spatial resolution of the panchromatic
image with the spectral richness of the multi-spectral image. This operation is called pan-sharpening.
This fusion operation requires two different steps :

1. The multi-spectral (XS) image is zoomed and registered to the panchromatic image,
2. A pixel-by-pixel fusion operator is applied to the co-registered pixels of the multi-spectral and
panchromatic image to obtain the fused pixels.

Using either OTB Applications or modules from Monteverdi, it is possible to perform both steps
in a row, or step-by-step fusion, as described in the above sections.
4.2. Optical pre-processing 47

Pan-sharpening with OTB Applications

The BundleToPerfectSensor application allows to perform both steps in a row. Seamless sensor mod-
elling is used to perform zooming and registration of the multi-spectral image on the panchromatic
image. Then, a simple pan-sharpening is applied, according to the following formula:

PAN(i, j)
PXS(i, j) = · XS(i, j) (4.1)
PANsmooth (i, j)

Where i and j are pixels indices, PAN is the panchromatic image, XS is the multi-spectral image and
PANsmooth is the panchromatic image smoothed with a kernel to fit the multi-spectral image scale.
Here is a simple example of how to use the BundleToPerfectSensor application:

otbcli_BundleToPerfectSensor -inp pan_image -inxs xs_image -out output_image

There are two more optional parameters that can be useful for this tool:

• The -elev option allows to specify the elevation, either with a DEM formatted for OTB
(-elev.dem option, see section 4.2.3) or with an average elevation (-elev.default option).
Since registration and zooming of the multi-spectral image is performed using sensor-models,
it may happen that the registration is not perfect in case of landscape with high elevation
variation. Using a DEM in this case allows to get better registration.
• The -lmSpacing option allows to specify the step of the registration grid between the multi-
spectral image and panchromatic image. This is expressed in amount of panchromatic pixels.
A lower value gives a more precise registration but implies more computation with the sensor
models, and thus increase the computation time. Default value is 10 pixels, which gives
sufficient precision in most of the cases.

Pan-sharpening is a quite heavy processing requiring a lot of system resource. The -ram option
allows you to limit the amount of memory available for the computation, and to avoid overloading
your computer. Increasing the available amount of RAM may also result in better computation time,
seems it optimises the use of the system resources. Default value is 256 Mb.

Pan-sharpening with Monteverdi

Monteverdi allows to perform step-by-step fusion. The followings screenshots highlight operations
needed to perform Pan-Sharpening.

• Open panchromatic and multispectral images in monteverdi using the Open Dataset module
or using the -il option of the Monteverdi executable.
48 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.8: Panchromatic, Zoomed, and registered multispectral image.

Figure 4.9: Pan-sharpened image using the simple RCS module.

• The Superimpose module is used to zoomed and registered the multispectral on the panchro-
matic image. As a result, we get a multispectral dataset with the same geographic extension
and the same resolution as the panchromatic image, cf 4.8.
• Now the Simple RCS pan-sharpening module can be used using the panchromatic and the
multispectral images as inputs. It produces a multispectral image with the same resolution
and geographic extension (cf 4.9).

Please also note that since registration and zooming of the multi-spectral image with the panchro-
matic image relies on sensor modelling, this tool will work only for images whose sensor models is
available in Orfeo ToolBox (see section 4.2.4 for a detailed list). It will also work with ortho-ready
products in cartographic projection.

4.2.3 Digital Elevation Model management

A Digital Elevation Model (DEM) is a georeferenced image (or collection of images) where each
pixel corresponds to a local elevation. DEM are useful for tasks involving sensor to ground and
4.2. Optical pre-processing 49

ground to sensor coordinate transforms, like during ortho-rectification (see section 4.2.4). These
transforms need to find the intersection between the line of sight of the sensor and the earth geoid.
If a simple spheroid is used as the earth model, potentially high localisation errors can be made in
areas where elevation is high or perturbed. Of course, DEM accuracy and resolution have a great
impact on the precision of these transforms.
Two main available DEM, free of charges, and with worldwide cover, are both delivered as 1 degree
by 1 degree tiles:

• The Shuttle Radar topographic Mission (SRTM) is a 90 meters resolution DEM, obtained by
radar interferometry during a campaign of the Endeavour space shuttle from NASA in 2000.
• The Advanced Spaceborne Thermal Emission and Reflection Radiometer (ASTER) is a 30
meters resolution DEM obtained by stereoscopic processing of the archive of the ASTER
instrument.

The Orfeo ToolBox relies on OSSIM capabilities for sensor modelling and DEM handling. Tiles of
a given DEM are supposed to be located within a single directory. General elevation support is also
supported from GeoTIFF files.
Whenever an application or Monteverdi module requires a DEM, the option elev.dem allows set
the DEM directory. This directory must contains the DEM tiles, either in DTED or SRTM format,
either as GeoTIFF files. Subdirectories are not supported.
Depending on the reference of the elevation, you also need to use a geoid to manage elevation
accurately. For this, you need to specify a path to a file which contains the geoid. Geoid corresponds
to the equipotential surface that would coincide with the mean ocean surface of the Earth (see ). We
provide one geoid in the OTB-Data repository available here.
In all applications, the option elev.geoid allows to manage the path to the geoid. Finally, it is also
possible to use an average elevation in case no DEM is available by using the elev.default option.

4.2.4 Ortho-rectification and map projections

There are several level of products available on the remote sensing imagery market. The most basic
level often provide the geometry of acquisition (sometimes called the raw geometry). In this case,
pixel coordinates can not be directly used as geographical positions. For most sensors (but not for
all), the different lines corresponds to different acquisition times and thus different sensor positions,
and different rows correspond to different cells of the detector.
The mapping of a raw image so as to be registered to a cartographic grid is called ortho-rectification,
and consist in inverting the following effects (at least):

• In most cases, lines are orthogonal to the sensor trajectory, which is not exactly (and in some
case not at all) following a north-south axis,
50 Chapter 4. Recipes

• Depending on the sensor, the line of sight may be different from a Nadir (ground position of
the sensor), and thus a projective warping may appear,
• The variation of height in the landscape may result in severe warping of the image.

Moreover, depending on the area of the world the image has been acquired on, different map pro-
jections should be used.
The ortho-rectification process is as follows: once an appropriate map projection has been defined,
a localisation grid is computed to map pixels from the raw image to the ortho-rectified one. Pixels
from the raw image are then interpolated according to this grid in order to fill the ortho-rectified
pixels.
Ortho-rectification can be performed either with OTB Applications or Monteverdi. Sensor pa-
rameters and image meta-data are seamlessly read from the image files without needing any user
interaction, provided that all auxiliary files are available. The sensor for which Orfeo ToolBox
supports ortho-rectification of raw products are the following:

• Pleiades,

• SPOT5,
• Ikonos,
• Quickbird,
• GeoEye,

• WorldView.

In addition, GeoTiff and other file format with geographical information are seamlessly read by
Orfeo ToolBox, and the ortho-rectification tools can be used to re-sample these images in another
map projection.

Ortho-rectification with OTB Applications

The OrthoRectification application allows to perform ortho-rectification and map re-projection. The
simplest way to use it is the following command:

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in input_image -io.out output_image

In this case, the tool will automatically estimates all the necessary parameters:

• The map projection is set to UTM (a worldwide map projection) and the UTM zone is auto-
matically estimated,
4.2. Optical pre-processing 51

• The ground sampling distance of the output image is computed to fit the image resolution,
• The region of interest (upper-left corner and size of the image) is estimated so as to contain
the whole input image extent.

In order to use a Digital Elevation Model (see section 4.2.3) for better localisation performances,
one can pass the directory containing the DEM tiles to the application:

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in input_image

-io.out output_image
-elev.dem dem_dir

If one wants to use a different map projection, the -map option may be used (example with lambert93
map projection):

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in input_image

-io.out output_image
-elev.dem dem_dir
-map lambert93

Map projections handled by the application are the following (please note that the ellipsoid is always
WGS84):

• UTM : -map utm

The UTM zone and hemisphere can be set by the options -map.utm.zone and
-map.utm.northhem.
• Lambert 2 etendu: -map lambert2
• Lambert 93: -map lambert93
• TransMercator: -map transmercator
The related parameters (false easting, false northing and scale factor) can be set by the op-
tions -map.transmercator.falseeasting, -map.transmercator.falsenorthing and
-map.transmercator.scale
• WGS : -map wgs
• Any map projection system with an EPSG code : -map epsg
The EPSG code is set with the option -map.epsg.code

The group outputs contains parameters to set the origin, size and spacing of the output image. For
instance, the ground spacing can be specified as follows:
52 Chapter 4. Recipes

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in input_image

-io.out output_image
-elev.dem dem_dir
-map lambert93
-outputs.spacingx spx
-outputs.spacingy spy

Please note that since the y axis of the image is bottom oriented, the y spacing should be negative to
avoid switching north and south direction.
A user-defined region of interest to ortho-rectify can be specified as follows:

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in input_image

-io.out output_image
-elev.dem dem_dir
-map lambert93
-outputs.spacingx spx
-outputs.spacingy spy
-outputs.ulx ul_x_coord
-outputs.uly ul_y_coord
-outputs.sizex x_size
-outputs.sizey y_size

Where the -outputs.ulx and -outputs.uly options allow to specify the coordinates of the upper-
left corner of the output image. The -outputs.sizex and -outputs.sizey options allow to spec-
ify the size of the output image.
A few more interesting options are available:

• The -opt.rpc option allows to use an estimated RPC model instead of the rigorous SPOT5
model, which speeds-up the processing,
• The -opt.gridspacing option allows to define the spacing of the localisation grid used for
ortho-rectification. A coarser grid results in speeding-up the processing, but with potential
loss of accuracy. A standard value would be 10 times the ground spacing of the output image.
• The -interpolator option allows to change the interpolation algorithm between nearest
neighbor, linear and bicubic. Default is nearest neighbor interpolation, but bicubic should be
fine in most cases.
4.2. Optical pre-processing 53

• The -opt.ram option allows to specify the amount of memory available for the processing (in
Mb). Default is 256 Mb. Increasing this value to fit the available memory on your computer
might speed-up the processing.

4.2.5 Residual registration

Image registration is a fundamental problem in image processing. The aim is to align two or more
images of the same scene often taken at different times, from different viewpoints, or by differ-
ent sensors. It is a basic step for orthorectification, image stitching, image fusion, change de-
tection. . . But this process is also critical for stereo reconstruction process to be able to obtain an
accurate estimation of epipolar geometry.
Sensor model is generally not sufficient to provide image registrations. Indeed, several sources of
geometric distortion can be contained in optical remote sensing images including earth rotation,
platform movement, non linearity. . .
They result in geometric errors on scene level, image level and pixel level. It is critical to rectify
the errors before a thematic map is generated, especially when the remote sensing data need to be
integrated together with other GIS data.
This figure illustrates the generic workflow in the case of image series registration:

Bundle-block
Homologous Points
Adjustement

Fine Map Pro-

Sensor
Regis- jection
Model
tration

Input series Geo-referenced Series Registered Series Cartographic Series

DEM

We will now illustrate this process by applying this workflow to register two images. This process
can be easily extended to perform image series registration.
The aim of this example is to describe how to register a Level 1 QuickBird image over an orthorectify
Pleiades image over the area of Toulouse, France.

Extract metadata from the image reference

We first dump geometry metadata of the image we want to refine in a text file. In OTB, we use
the extension .geom for this type of file. As you will see the application which will estimate a
54 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.10: From left to right: Pleiades ortho-image, and original QuickBird image over Toulouse

refine geometry only needs as input this metadata and a set of homologous points. The refinement
application will create a new .geom file containing refined geometry parameters which can be used
after for reprojection for example.
The use of external .geom file is available in OTB since release 3.16. See here for more information.

otbcli_ReadImageInfo -in slave_image

-outkwl TheGeom.geom

Extract homologous points from images

The main idea of the residual registration is to estimate an second transformation (after the applica-
tion of sensors model).
The homologous point application use interest point detection method to get a set of point which
match in both images.
The basic idea is to use this set of homologous points and estimate with them a residual transforma-
tion between the two images.
There is a wide variety of keypoint detector in the literature. They allow to detect and describe local
features in images. These algorithms provide for each interesting point a “feature description”. This
descriptor has the property to be invariant to image translation, scaling, and rotation, partially invari-
4.2. Optical pre-processing 55

ant to illumination changes and robust to local geometric distortion. keypoints. Features extracted
from the input images are then matched against each other. These correspondences are then used to
create the homologous points.
SIFT or SURF keypoints can be computed in the application. The band on which keypoints are
computed can be set independently for both images.
The application offers two modes :

• the first is the full mode where keypoints are extracted from the full extent of both images
(please note that in this mode large image file are not supported).
• The second mode, called geobins, allows to set-up spatial binning so as to get fewer points
spread across the entire image. In this mode, the corresponding spatial bin in the second image
is estimated using geographical transform or sensor modeling, and is padded according to the
user defined precision.

Moreover, in both modes the application can filter matches whose co-localization in the first im-
age exceed this precision. Last, the elevation parameters allow to deal more precisely with sensor
modelling in case of sensor geometry data. The outvector option allows to create a vector file with
segments corresponding to the localization error between the matches.
Finally, with the 2wgs84 option, you can match two sensor geometry images or a sensor geometry
image with an ortho-rectified reference. In all cases, you get a list of ground control points spread
all over your image.

otbcli_HomologousPointsExtraction -in1 slave_image

-in2 reference_image
-algorithm.surf
-mode geobins
-mode.geobins.binstep 512
-mode.geobins.binsize 512
-mfilter 1
-precision 20
-2wgs84 1
-out homologous_points.txt
-outvector points.shp
-elev.dem dem_path/SRTM4-HGT/
-elev.geoid OTB-Data/Input/DEM/egm96.grd

Note that for a proper use of the application, elevation must be correctly set (including DEM and
geoid file).
56 Chapter 4. Recipes

Geometry refinement using homologous points

Now that we can use this set of tie points to estimate a residual transformation.For this we use the
dedicated application called RefineSensorModel. This application make use of OSSIM capabilities
to align the sensor model.
It reads the input geometry metadata file (.geom) which contains the sensor model information that
we want to refine and the text file (homologous points.txt) containing the list of ground control
point. It performs a least-square fit of the sensor model adjustable parameters to these tie points and
produces an updated geometry file as output (the extension which is always use is .geom)
The application can provide as well an optional ground control points based statistics file and a
vector file containing residues that you can display in a GIS software.
Please note again that for a proper use of the application, elevation must be correctly set (including
DEM and geoid file). The map parameters allows to choose a map projection in which the accuracy
will be estimated (in meters).
Accuracy values are provided as output of the application (computed using tie points location) and
allow also to control the precision of the estimated model.

otbcli_RefineSensorModel -elev.dem dem_path/SRTM4-HGT/

-elev.geoid OTB-Data/Input/DEM/egm96.grd
-ingeom slave_image.geom
-outgeom refined_slave_image.geom
-inpoints homologous_points.txt
-outstat stats.txt
-outvector refined_slave_image.shp

Orthorecrtify image using the affine geometry

Now we will show how we can use this new sensor model. In our case we’ll use this sensor model to
orthorectify the image over the Plà iades
c reference. Orfeo ToolBox offers since version 3.16 the
possibility to use hrefhttp://wiki.orfeo-toolbox.org/index.php/ExtendedFileNameextend image path
to use different metadata file as input. That’s what we are going to use there to orthorectify the
QuickBird image using the .geom file obtained by the RefineSensorModel applications. over the
first one using for the second image estimated sensor model which take into account the original
sensor model of the slave and which also fit to the set of tie points.

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io.in slave_image?&geom=TheRefinedGeom.geom

-io.out ortho_slave_image
-elev.dem dem_path/SRTM4-HGT/
4.3. Image processing and information extraction 57

-elev.geoid OTB-Data/Input/DEM/egm96.grd

As a result, if you’ve got enough homologous points in images and control that the residual error
between the set of tie points and the estimated sensor model is small, you must achieve a good
registration now between the 2 rectified images. Normally far better than ’only’ performing separate
orthorectification over the 2 images.
This methodology can be adapt and apply in several cases, for example :

• register stereo pair of images and estimate accurate epipolar geometry

• registration prior to change detection

4.3 Image processing and information extraction

4.3.1 Simple calculus with channels

The BandMath application provides a simple and efficient way to perform band operations. The
command line application and the corresponding Monteverdi module (shown in the section 2.4.4)
are based on the same standards. It computes a band wise operation according to a user defined
mathematical expression. The following code computes the absolute difference between first bands
of two images:

otbcli_BandMath -il input_image_1 input_image_2

-exp "abs(im1b1 - im2b1)"
-out output_image

The naming convention ”im[x]b[y]” designates the yth band of the xth input image.
The BandMath application embeds built-in operators and functions (listed here), allowing a vast
choice of possible operations.

4.3.2 Segmentation

Segmenting objects across a very high resolution scene and with a controlled quality is a difficult task
for which no method has reached a sufficient level of performance to be considered as operational.
Even if we leave aside the question of segmentation quality and consider that we have a method
performing reasonably well on our data and objects of interest, the task of scaling up segmentation
to real very high resolution data is itself challenging. First, we can not load the whole data into
memory, and there is a need for on the flow processing which does not cope well with traditional
58 Chapter 4. Recipes

segmentation algorithms. Second, the result of the segmentation process itself is difficult to represent
and manipulate efficiently.
The experience of segmenting large remote sensing images is packed into a single Segmentation in
OTB Applications.
You can find more information about this application here.

4.3.3 Large-Scale Mean-Shift (LSMS) segmentation

LSMS is a segmentation workflow which allows to perform tile-wise segmentation of very large
image with theoretical guarantees of getting identical results to those without tiling. It has been
developed by David Youssefi and Julien Michel during David internship at CNES and is to be pub-
lished soon.
The workflow consists in chaining 3 or 4 dedicated applications and produces a GIS vector file with
artifact-free polygons corresponding to the segmented image, as well as mean and variance of the
radiometry of each band for each polygon.

Step 1: Mean-Shift Smoothing

The first step of the workflow is to perform Mean-Shift smoothing with the MeanShiftSmoothing
application:

otbcli_MeanShiftSmoothing -in input_image

-fout filtered_range.tif
-foutpos filtered_spat.tif
-ranger 30
-spatialr 5
-maxiter 10
-modesearch 0

Note that the modesearch option should be disabled, and that the foutpos parameter is optional: it
can be activated if you want to perform the segmentation based on both spatial and range modes.
This application will smooth large images by streaming them, and deactivating the modesearch will
guarantee that the results will not depend on the streaming scheme. Please also note that the maxiter
is used to set the margin to ensure these identical results, and as such increasing the maxiter may
have an additional impact on processing time.

Step 2: Segmentation

The next step is to produce an initial segmentation based on the smoothed images produced by the
MeanShiftSmoothing application. To do so, the LSMSSegmentation will process them by tiles whose
4.3. Image processing and information extraction 59

dimensions are defined by the tilesizex and tilesizey parameters, and by writing intermediate images
to disk, thus keeping the memory consumption very low throughout the process. The segmenta-
tion will group together adjacent pixels whose range distance is below the ranger parameter and
(optionally) spatial distance is below the spatialr parameter.

otbcli_LSMSSegmentation -in filtered_range.tif

-inpos filtered_spatial.tif
-out segmentation.tif uint32
-ranger 30
-spatialr 5
-minsize 0
-tilesizex 256
-tilesizey 256

Note that the final segmentation image may contains a very large number of segments, and the
uint32 image type should therefore be used to ensure that there will be enough labels to index those
segments. The minsize parameter will filter segments whose size in pixels is below its value, and
their labels will be set to 0 (nodata).
Please note that the output segmented image may look patchy, as if there were tiling artifacts: this is
because segments are numbered sequentially with respect to the order in which tiles are processed.
You will see after the result of the vectorization step that there are no artifacts in the results.
The LSMSSegmentation application will write as many intermediate files as tiles needed during
processing. As such, it may require twice as free disk space as the final size of the final image. The
cleanup option (active by default) will clear the intermediate files during the processing as soon as
they are not needed anymore. By default, files will be written to the current directory. The tmpdir
option allows to specify a different directory for these intermediate files.

Step 3 (optional): Merging small regions

The LSMSSegmentation application allows to filter out small segments. In the output segmented
image, those segments will be removed and replaced by the background label (0). Another solution
to deal with the small regions is to merge them with the closest big enough adjacent region in terms
of radiometry. This is handled by the LSMSSmallRegionsMerging application, which will output a
segmented image where small regions have been merged. Again, the uint32 image type is advised
for this output image.

otbcli_LSMSSmallRegionsMerging -in filtered_range.tif

-inseg segementation.tif
-out segmentation_merged.tif uint32
-minsize 10
-tilesizex 256
-tilesizey 256
60 Chapter 4. Recipes

The minsize parameter allows to specify the threshold on the size of the regions to be merged. Like
the LSMSSegmentation application, this application will process the input images tile-wise to keep
resources usage low, with the guarantee of identical results. You can set the tile size using the
tilesizex and tilesizey parameters. However unlike the LSMSSegmentation application, it does not
require to write any temporary file to disk.

Step 4: Vectorization

The last step of the LSMS workflow consists in the vectorization of the segmented image into a
GIS vector file. This vector file will contain one polygon per segment, and each of these polygons
will hold additional attributes denoting the label of the original segment, the size of the segment in
pixels, and the mean and variance of each band over the segment. The projection of the output GIS
vector file will be the same as the projection from the input image (if input image has no projection,
so does the output GIS file).

otbcli_LSMSVectorization -in input_image

-inseg segmentation_merged.tif
-out segmentation_merged.shp
-tilesizex 256
-tilesizey 256

This application will process the input images tile-wise to keep resources usage low, with the guaran-
tee of identical results. You can set the tile size using the tilesizex and tilesizey parameters. However
unlike the LSMSSegmentation application, it does not require to write any temporary file to disk.

4.3.4 Dempster Shafer based Classifier Fusion

This framework is dedicated to perform cartographic validation starting from the result of a detection
(for example a road extraction), enhance the results fiability by using a classifier fusion algorithm.
Using a set of descriptor, the processing chain validates or invalidates the input geometrical features.

Fuzzy Model (requisite)

The DSFuzzyModelEstimation application performs the fuzzy model estimation (once by use case:
descriptor set / Belief support / Plausibility support). It has the following input parameters :

• -psin a vector data of positive samples enriched according to the ”Compute Descriptors” part
• -nsin a vector data of negative samples enriched according to the ”Compute Descriptors”
part
• -belsup a support for the Belief computation
4.3. Image processing and information extraction 61

• -plasup a support for the Plausibility computation

• -desclist an initialization model (xml file) or a descriptor name list (listing the descriptors
to be included in the model)

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_DSFuzzyModelEstimation -psin PosSamples.shp

-nsin NegSamples.shp
-belsup "ROADSA"
-plasup "NONDVI" "ROADSA" "NOBUIL"
-desclist "NONDVI" "ROADSA" "NOBUIL"
-out FuzzyModel.xml

The output file FuzzyModel.xml contains the optimal model to perform informations fusion.

First Step: Compute Descriptors

The first step in the classifier fusion based validation is to compute, for each studied polyline, the
choosen descriptors. In this context, the ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage application can be
used for a large range of descriptors. It has the following inputs :

• -in an image (of the sudied scene) corresponding to the choosen descriptor (NDVI, building
Mask. . . )
• -vd a vector data containing polyline of interest
• -expr a formula (”b1 >0.4”, ”b1 == 0”) where b1 is the standard name of input image first
band
• -field a field name corresponding to the descriptor codename (NONDVI, ROADSA...)

The output is a vector data containing polylines with a new field containing the descriptor value. In
order to add the ”NONDVI” descriptor to an input vector data (”inVD.shp”) corresponding to the
percentage of pixels along a polyline that verifies the formula ”NDVI >0.4” :

otbcli_ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage -in NDVI.TIF

-vd inVD.shp
-expr "b1 > 0.4"
-field "NONDVI"
-out VD_NONDVI.shp

NDVI.TIF is the NDVI mono band image of the studied scene. This step must be repeated for each
choosen descriptor:
62 Chapter 4. Recipes

otbcli_ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage -in roadSpectralAngle.TIF

-vd VD_NONDVI.shp
-expr "b1 > 0.24"
-field "ROADSA"
-out VD_NONDVI_ROADSA.shp

otbcli_ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage -in Buildings.TIF

-vd VD_NONDVI_ROADSA.shp
-expr "b1 == 0"
-field "NOBUILDING"
-out VD_NONDVI_ROADSA_NOBUIL.shp

Both NDVI.TIF and roadSpectralAngle.TIF can be produced using Monteverdi feature extrac-
tion capabilities, and Buildings.TIF can be generated using Monteverdi rasterization module.
From now on, VD_NONDVI_ROADSA_NOBUIL.shp contains three descriptor fields. It will be used in
the following part.

Second Step: Feature Validation

The final application (VectorDataDSValidation) will validate or unvalidate the studied samples using
the Dempster-Shafer theory . Its inputs are :

• -in an enriched vector data ”VD NONDVI ROADSA NOBUIL.shp”

• -belsup a support for the Belief computation
• -plasup a support for the Plausibility computation
• -descmod a fuzzy model FuzzyModel.xml

The output is a vector data containing only the validated samples.

otbcli_VectorDataDSValidation -in extractedRoads_enriched.shp

-descmod FuzzyModel.xml
-out validatedSamples.shp

4.4 Classification

4.4.1 Pixel based classification

The classification in the application framework provides a supervised pixel-wise classification chain
based on learning from multiple images, and using one specified machine learning method like
4.4. Classification 63

SVM, Bayes, KNN, Random Forests, Artificial Neural Network, and others...(see application help
of TrainImagesClassifier for further details about all the available classifiers). It supports huge
images through streaming and multi-threading. The classification chain performs a training step
based on the intensities of each pixel as features. Please note that all the input images must have the
same number of bands to be comparable.

Statistics estimation

In order to make these features comparable between each training images, the first step consists in
estimating the input images statistics. These statistics will be used to center and reduce the intensities
(mean of 0 and standard deviation of 1) of samples based on the vector data produced by the user.
To do so, the ComputeImagesStatistics tool can be used:

otbcli_ComputeImagesStatistics -il im1.tif im2.tif im3.tif

-out images_statistics.xml

This tool will compute each band mean, compute the standard deviation based on pooled variance
of each band and finally export them to an XML file. The features statistics XML file will be an
input of the following tools.

Building the training data set

As the chain is supervised, we first need to build a training set with positive examples of different
objects of interest. This can be done with Monteverdi Vectorization module (Fig.4.11). These
polygons must be saved in OGR vector format supported by GDAL like ESRI shapefile for example.
This operation will be reproduced on each image used as input of the training function.
Please note that the positive examples in the vector data should have a “Class“ field with a label
value higher than 1 and coherent in each images.
You can generate the vector data set with Quantum GIS software for example and save it in an OGR
vector format supported by GDAL (ESRI sphapefile for example). OTB Applications should be
able to transform the vector data into the image coordinate system.

Performing the learning scheme

Once images statistics have been estimated, the learning scheme is the following:

1. For each input image:

(a) Read the region of interest (ROI) inside the shapefile,
(b) Generate validation and training data within the ROI,
64 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.11: A training data set builded with the vectorization monteverdi module.
4.4. Classification 65

(c) Add vectors respectively to the training samples set and the validation samples set.
2. Increase the size of the training samples set and balance it by generating new noisy samples
from the previous ones,
3. Perform the learning with this training set
4. Estimate performances of the classifier on the validation samples set (confusion matrix, pre-
cision, recall and F-Score).

Let us consider a SVM classification. These steps can be performed by the TrainImagesClassifier
command-line using the following:

otbcli_TrainImagesClassifier -io.il im1.tif im2.tif im3.tif

-io.vd vd1.shp vd2.shp vd3.shp
-io.imstat images_statistics.xml
-classifier svm (classifier_for_the_training)
-io.out model.svm

Additional groups of parameters are also available (see application help for more details):

• -elev Handling of elevation (DEM or average elevation)

• -sample Group of parameters for sampling
• -classifier Classifiers to use for the training, and their corresponding groups of parameters

Using the classification model

Once the classifier has been trained, one can apply the model to classify pixel inside defined classes
on a new image using the ImageClassifier application:

otbcli_ImageClassifier -in image.tif

-imstat images_statistics.xml
-model model.svm
-out labeled_image.tif

You can set an input mask to limit the classification to the mask area with value >0.

Validating the classification model

The performance of the model generated by the TrainImagesClassifier application is directly esti-
mated by the application itself, which displays the precision, recall and F-score of each class, and
can generate the global confusion matrix as an output *.CSV file.
66 Chapter 4. Recipes

With the ConputeConfusionMatrix application, it is also possible to estimate the performance of a

model from a classification map generated with the ImageClassifier application. This labeled image
is compared to positive reference samples (either represented as a raster labeled image or as a vector
data containing the reference classes). It will compute the confusion matrix and precision, recall and
F-score of each class too, based on the ConfusionMatrixCalculator class.

otbcli_ComputeConfusionMatrix -in labeled_image.tif

-ref vector
-ref.vector.in vectordata.shp
-ref.vector.field Class (name_of_label_field)
-out confusion_matrix.csv

Fancy classification results

Color mapping can be used to apply color transformations on the final graylevel label image. It
allows to get an RGB classification map by re-mapping the image values to be suitable for display
purposes. One can use the ColorMapping application. This tool will replace each label with an
8-bits RGB color specificied in a mapping file. The mapping file should look like this :

# Lines beginning with a # are ignored

1 255 0 0

In the previous example, 1 is the label and 255 0 0 is a RGB color (this one will be rendered as red).
To use the mapping tool, enter the following :

otbcli_ColorMapping -in labeled_image.tif

-method custom
-method.custom.lut lut_mapping_file.txt
-out RGB_color_image.tif

Other look-up tables (LUT) are available : standard continuous LUT, optimal LUT, and LUT com-
puted over a support image.

Example

We consider 4 classes: water, roads, vegetation and buildings with red roofs. Data is available in the
OTB-Data repository and this image is produced with the commands inside this file.

4.4.2 Fusion of classification maps

After having processed several classifications of the same input image but from different models or
methods (SVM, KNN, Random Forest,...), it is possible to make a fusion of these classification maps
4.4. Classification 67

Figure 4.12: From left to right: Original image, result image with fusion (with monteverdi viewer) of original
image and fancy classification and input image with fancy color classification from labeled image.

with the FusionOfClassifications application which uses either majority voting or the Demspter
Shafer framework to handle this fusion. The Fusion of Classifications generates a single more
robust and precise classification map which combines the information extracted from the input list
of labeled images.
The FusionOfClassifications application has the following input parameters :

• -il list of input labeled classification images to fuse

• -out the output labeled image resulting from the fusion of the input classification images
• -method the fusion method (either by majority voting or by Dempster Shafer)
• -nodatalabel label for the no data class (default value = 0)

• -undecidedlabel label for the undecided class (default value = 0)

The input pixels with the nodata class label are simply ignored by the fusion process. Moreover,
the output pixels for which the fusion process does not result in a unique class label, are set to the
undecided value.

Majority voting for the fusion of classifications

In the Majority Voting method implemented in the FusionOfClassifications application, the value of
each output pixel is equal to the more frequent class label of the same pixel in the input classification
maps. However, it may happen that the more frequent class labels are not unique in individual pixels.
In that case, the undecided label is attributed to the output pixels.
The application can be used like this:
68 Chapter 4. Recipes

otbcli_FusionOfClassifications -il cmap1.tif cmap2.tif cmap3.tif

-method majorityvoting
-nodatalabel 0
-undecidedlabel 10
-out MVFusedClassificationMap.tif

Let us consider 6 independent classification maps of the same input image (Cf. left image in Fig.
4.12) generated from 6 different SVM models. The Fig. 4.13 represents them after a color mapping
by the same LUT. Thus, 4 classes (water: blue, roads: gray, vegetation: green, buildings with red
roofs: red) are observable on each of them.

Figure 4.13: Six fancy colored classified images to be fused, generated from 6 different SVM models.

As an example of the FusionOfClassifications application by majority voting, the fusion of the six
input classification maps represented in Fig. 4.13 leads to the classification map illustrated on the
right in Fig. 4.14. Thus, it appears that this fusion highlights the more relevant classes among the
six different input classifications. The white parts of the fused image correspond to the undecided
class labels, i.e. to pixels for which there is not a unique majority voting.
4.4. Classification 69

Figure 4.14: From left to right: Original image, and fancy colored classified image obtained by a majority voting
fusion of the 6 classification maps represented in Fig. 4.13 (water: blue, roads: gray, vegetation: green, buildings
with red roofs: red, undecided: white).

Dempster Shafer framework for the fusion of classifications

The FusionOfClassifications application, handles another method to compute the fusion: the Demp-
ster Shafer framework. In the Dempster-Shafer theory, the performance of each classifier resulting
in the classification maps to fuse are evaluated with the help of the so-called belief function of each
class label, which measures the degree of belief that the corresponding label is correctly assigned
to a pixel. For each classifier, and for each class label, these belief functions are estimated from
another parameter called the mass of belief of each class label, which measures the confidence that
the user can have in each classifier according to the resulting labels.
In the Dempster Shafer framework for the fusion of classification maps, the fused class label for
each pixel is the one with the maximal belief function. In case of multiple class labels maximizing
the belief functions, the output fused pixels are set to the undecided value.
In order to estimate the confidence level in each classification map, each of them should be con-
fronted with a ground truth. For this purpose, the masses of belief of the class labels resulting from
a classifier are estimated from its confusion matrix, which is itself exported as a *.CSV file with
the help of the ComputeConfusionMatrix application. Thus, using the Dempster Shafer method to
fuse classification maps needs an additional input list of such *.CSV files corresponding to their
respective confusion matrices.
The application can be used like this:

otbcli_FusionOfClassifications -il cmap1.tif cmap2.tif cmap3.tif

-method dempstershafer
-method.dempstershafer.cmfl
cmat1.csv cmat2.csv cmat3.csv
-nodatalabel 0
-undecidedlabel 10
70 Chapter 4. Recipes

-out DSFusedClassificationMap.tif

As an example of the FusionOfClassifications application by Dempster Shafer, the fusion of the

six input classification maps represented in Fig. 4.13 leads to the classification map illustrated on
the right in Fig. 4.15. Thus, it appears that this fusion gives access to a more precise and robust
classification map based on the confidence level in each classifier.

Figure 4.15: From left to right: Original image, and fancy colored classified image obtained by a Dempster
Shafer fusion of the 6 classification maps represented in Fig. 4.13 (water: blue, roads: gray, vegetation: green,
buildings with red roofs: red, undecided: white).

Recommandations to properly use the fusion of classification maps

In order to properly use the FusionOfClassifications application, some points should be considered.
First, the list_of_input_images and OutputFusedClassificationImage are single band la-
beled images, which means that the value of each pixel corresponds to the class label it belongs to,
and labels in each classification map must represent the same class. Secondly, the undecided label
value must be different from existing labels in the input images in order to avoid any ambiguity in
the interpretation of the OutputFusedClassificationImage.

4.4.3 Majority voting based classification map regularization

Resulting classification maps can be regularized in order to smoothen irregular classes. Such a
regularization process improves classification results by making more homogeneous areas which
are easier to handle.

Majority voting for the classification map regularization

The ClassificationMapRegularization application performs a regularization of a labeled input image

based on the Majority Voting method in a specified ball shaped neighborhood. For each center pixel,
4.4. Classification 71

Majority Voting takes the more representative value of all the pixels identified by the structuring ele-
ment and then sets the output center pixel to this majority label value. The ball shaped neighborhood
is identified by its radius expressed in pixels.

Handling ambiguity and not classified pixels in the majority voting based regularization

Since, the Majority Voting regularization may lead to not unique majority labels in the neighborhood,
it is important to define which behaviour the filter must have in this case. For this purpose, a Boolean
parameter (called ip.suvbool) is used in the ClassificationMapRegularization application to choose
whether pixels with more than one majority class are set to Undecided (true), or to their Original
labels (false = default value).
Moreover, it may happen that pixels in the input image do not belong to any of the considered class.
Such pixels are assumed to belong to the NoData class, the label of which is specified as an input
parameter for the regularization. Therefore, those NoData input pixels are invariant and keep their
NoData label in the output regularized image.
The ClassificationMapRegularization application has the following input parameters :

• -io.in a labeled input image resulting from a previous classification process

• -io.out the output labeled image corresponding to the regularization of the input image
• -ip.radius an integer corresponding to the radius of the ball shaped structuring element
(default value = 1 pixel)

• -ip.suvbool a Boolean number used to choose whether pixels with more than one majority
class are set to Undecided (true), or to their Original labels (false = default value). Please note
that the Undecided value must be different from existing labels in the input image
• -ip.nodatalabel label for the NoData class. Such input pixels keep their NoData label in
the output image (default value = 0)

• -ip.undecidedlabel label for the Undecided class (default value = 0).

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_ClassificationMapRegularization -io.in labeled_image.tif

-ip.radius 3
-ip.suvbool true
-ip.nodatalabel 10
-ip.undecidedlabel 7
-io.out regularized.tif
72 Chapter 4. Recipes

Recommandations to properly use the majority voting based regularization

In order to properly use the ClassificationMapRegularization application, some points should be

considered. First, both InputLabeledImage and OutputLabeledImage are single band labeled
images, which means that the value of each pixel corresponds to the class label it belongs to. The
InputLabeledImage is commonly an image generated with a classification algorithm such as the
SVM classification. Remark: both InputLabeledImage and OutputLabeledImage are not nec-
essarily of the same datatype. Secondly, if ip.suvbool == true, the Undecided label value must be
different from existing labels in the input labeled image in order to avoid any ambiguity in the in-
terpretation of the regularized OutputLabeledImage. Finally, the structuring element radius must
have a minimum value equal to 1 pixel, which is its default value. Both NoData and Undecided
labels have a default value equal to 0.

Example

Resulting from the ColorMapping application presented in section 4.4.1, and illustrated in Fig. 4.12,
the Fig. 4.16 shows a regularization of a classification map composed of 4 classes: water, roads,
vegetation and buildings with red roofs. The radius of the ball shaped structuring element is equal
to 3 pixels, which corresponds to a ball included in a 7 x 7 pixels square. Pixels with more than one
majority class keep their original labels.

Figure 4.16: From left to right: Original image, fancy colored classified image and regularized classification
map with radius equal to 3 pixels.

4.5 Feature extraction

As described in the OTB Software Guide, the term Feature Extraction refers to techniques aiming at
extracting added value information from images. These extracted items named features can be local
statistical moments, edges, radiometric indices, morphological and textural properties. For example,
4.5. Feature extraction 73

such features can be used as input data for other image processing methods like Segmentation and
Classification.

4.5.1 Local statistics extraction

This application computes the 4 local statistical moments on every pixel in the selected channel of
the input image, over a specified neighborhood. The output image is multi band with one statistical
moment (feature) per band. Thus, the 4 output features are the Mean, the Variance, the Skewness
and the Kurtosis. They are provided in this exact order in the output image.
The LocalStatisticExtraction application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to compute the features on

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)
• -radius the computational window radius (default value is 3 pixels)

• -out the output image containing the local statistical moments

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_LocalStatisticExtraction -in InputImage

-channel 1
-radius 3
-out OutputImage

4.5.2 Edge extraction

This application Computes edge features on every pixel in the selected channel of the input image.
The EdgeExtraction application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to compute the features on

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)
• -filter the choice of edge detection method (gradient/sobel/touzi) (default value is gradient)

• (-filter.touzi.xradius) the X Radius of the Touzi processing neighborhood (only if

filter==touzi) (default value is 1 pixel)
74 Chapter 4. Recipes

• (-filter.touzi.yradius) the Y Radius of the Touzi processing neighborhood (only if

filter==touzi) (default value is 1 pixel)

• -out the output mono band image containing the edge features

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_EdgeExtraction -in InputImage

-channel 1
-filter sobel
-out OutputImage

or like this if filter==touzi:

otbcli_EdgeExtraction -in InputImage

-channel 1
-filter touzi
-filter.touzi.xradius 2
-filter.touzi.yradius 2
-out OutputImage

4.5.3 Radiometric indices extraction

This application computes radiometric indices using the channels of the input image. The output is
a multi band image into which each channel is one of the selected indices.
The RadiometricIndices application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to compute the features on

• -out the output image containing the radiometric indices
• -channels.blue the Blue channel index in the input image (default value is 1)
• -channels.green the Green channel index in the input image (default value is 1)
• -channels.red the Red channel index in the input image (default value is 1)
• -channels.nir the Near Infrared channel index in the input image (default value is 1)
• -channels.mir the Mid-Infrared channel index in the input image (default value is 1)
• -list the list of available radiometric indices (default value is Vegetation:NDVI)

The available radiometric indices to be listed into -list with their relevant channels in brackets are:
4.5. Feature extraction 75

Vegetation:NDVI - Normalized difference vegetation index (Red, NIR)

Vegetation:TNDVI - Transformed normalized difference vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:RVI - Ratio vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:SAVI - Soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:TSAVI - Transformed soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:MSAVI - Modified soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:MSAVI2 - Modified soil adjusted vegetation index 2 (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:GEMI - Global environment monitoring index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:IPVI - Infrared percentage vegetation index (Red, NIR)

Water:NDWI - Normalized difference water index (Gao 1996) (NIR, MIR)

Water:NDWI2 - Normalized difference water index (Mc Feeters 1996) (Green, NIR)
Water:MNDWI - Modified normalized difference water index (Xu 2006) (Green, MIR)
Water:NDPI - Normalized difference pond index (Lacaux et al.) (MIR, Green)
Water:NDTI - Normalized difference turbidity index (Lacaux et al.) (Red, Green)

Soil:RI - Redness index (Red, Green)

Soil:CI - Color index (Red, Green)
Soil:BI - Brightness index (Red, Green)
Soil:BI2 - Brightness index 2 (NIR, Red, Green)

The application can be used like this, which leads to an output image with 3 bands, respectively with
the Vegetation:NDVI, Vegetation:RVI and Vegetation:IPVI radiometric indices in this exact order:

otbcli_RadiometricIndices -in InputImage

-out OutputImage
-channels.red 3
-channels.green 2
-channels.nir 4
-list Vegetation:NDVI Vegetation:RVI
Vegetation:IPVI

or like this, which leads to a single band output image with the Water:NDWI2 radiometric indice:

otbcli_RadiometricIndices -in InputImage

-out OutputImage
-channels.red 3
-channels.green 2
-channels.nir 4
-list Water:NDWI2
76 Chapter 4. Recipes

4.5.4 Morphological features extraction

Morphological features can be highlighted by using image filters based on mathematical morphology
either on binary or gray scale images.

Binary morphological operations

This application performs binary morphological operations (dilation, erosion, opening and closing)
on a mono band image with a specific structuring element (a ball or a cross) having one radius along
X and another one along Y. NB: the cross shaped structuring element has a fixed radius equal to 1
pixel in both X and Y directions.
The BinaryMorphologicalOperation application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to be filtered

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)
• -structype the choice of the structuring element type (ball/cross) (default value is ball)
• (-structype.ball.xradius) the ball structuring element X Radius (only if struc-
type==ball) (default value is 5 pixels)
• (-structype.ball.yradius) the ball structuring element Y Radius (only if struc-
type==ball) (default value is 5 pixels)
• -filter the choice of the morphological operation (dilate/erode/opening/closing) (default
value is dilate)
• (-filter.dilate.foreval) the foreground value for the dilation (idem for fil-
ter.erode/opening/closing) (default value is 1)
• (-filter.dilate.backval) the background value for the dilation (idem for fil-
ter.erode/opening/closing) (default value is 0)
• -out the output filtered image

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_BinaryMorphologicalOperation -in InputImage

-channel 1
-structype ball
-structype.ball.xradius 10
-structype.ball.yradius 5
-filter opening
-filter.opening.foreval 1.0
-filter.opening.backval 0.0
-out OutputImage
4.5. Feature extraction 77

Gray scale morphological operations

This application performs morphological operations (dilation, erosion, opening and closing) on a
gray scale mono band image with a specific structuring element (a ball or a cross) having one radius
along X and another one along Y. NB: the cross shaped structuring element has a fixed radius equal
to 1 pixel in both X and Y directions.
The GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to be filtered

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)
• -structype the choice of the structuring element type (ball/cross) (default value is ball)
• (-structype.ball.xradius) the ball structuring element X Radius (only if struc-
type==ball) (default value is 5 pixels)
• (-structype.ball.yradius) the ball structuring element Y Radius (only if struc-
type==ball) (default value is 5 pixels)
• -filter the choice of the morphological operation (dilate/erode/opening/closing) (default
value is dilate)
• -out the output filtered image

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation -in InputImage

-channel 1
-structype ball
-structype.ball.xradius 10
-structype.ball.yradius 5
-filter opening
-out OutputImage

4.5.5 Textural features extraction

Texture features can be extracted with the help of image filters based on texture analysis methods
like Haralick and structural feature set (SFS).

Haralick texture features

This application computes Haralick, advanced and higher order texture features on every pixel in
the selected channel of the input image. The output image is multi band with a feature per band.
78 Chapter 4. Recipes

The HaralickTextureExtraction application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to compute the features on

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)

• -texture the texture set selection [simple/advanced/higher] (default value is simple)

• -parameters.min the input image minimum (default value is 0)
• -parameters.max the input image maximum (default value is 255)

• -parameters.xrad the X Radius of the processing neighborhood (default value is 2 pixels)

• -parameters.yrad the Y Radius of the processing neighborhood (default value is 2 pixels)
• -parameters.xoff the ∆X Offset for the co-occurrence computation (default value is 1 pixel)
• -parameters.yoff the ∆Y Offset for the co-occurrence computation (default value is 1 pixel)

• -parameters.nbbin the number of bin per axis for histogram generation (default value is 8)
• -out the output multi band image containing the selected texture features (one feature per
band)

The available values for -texture with their relevant features are:

• -texture=simple: In this case, 8 local Haralick textures features will be processed. The 8
output image channels are: Energy, Entropy, Correlation, Inverse Difference Moment, Inertia,
Cluster Shade, Cluster Prominence and Haralick Correlation. They are provided in this exact
order in the output image. Thus, this application computes the following Haralick textures
over a sliding windows with user defined radius: (where g(i, j) is the element in cell i, j of a
normalized Gray Level Co-occurrence Matrix (GLCM)):
”Energy” = f1 = ∑i, j g(i, j)2
”Entropy” = f2 = − ∑i, j g(i, j) log2 g(i, j), or 0 if g(i, j) = 0
”Correlation” = f3 = ∑i, j (i−µ)( j−µ)g(i,
σ2
j)

1
”Inverse Difference Moment” = f4 = ∑i, j 1+(i− j)2
g(i, j)
”Inertia” = f5 = ∑i, j (i − j)2 g(i, j) (sometimes called ”contrast”)
”Cluster Shade” = f6 = ∑i, j ((i − µ) + ( j − µ))3 g(i, j)
”Cluster Prominence” = f7 = ∑i, j ((i − µ) + ( j − µ))4 g(i, j)
∑ (i, j)g(i, j)−µ2
”Haralick’s Correlation” = f8 = i, j σ2 t
where µt and σt are the mean and standard
t
deviation of the row (or column, due to symmetry) sums.
4.5. Feature extraction 79

Above, µ = (weighted pixel average) = ∑i, j i · g(i, j) = ∑i, j j · g(i, j) (due to matrix symmetry),
and σ = (weighted pixel variance) = ∑i, j (i − µ)2 · g(i, j) = ∑i, j ( j − µ)2 · g(i, j) (due to matrix
symmetry).
• -texture=advanced: In this case, 9 advanced texture features will be processed. The 9
output image channels are: Mean, Variance, Sum Average, Sum Variance, Sum Entropy, Dif-
ference of Entropies, Difference of Variances, IC1 and IC2. They are provided in this exact
order in the output image.
• -texture=higher: In this case, 11 local higher order statistics texture coefficients based on
the grey level run-length matrix will be processed. The 11 output image channels are: Short
Run Emphasis, Long Run Emphasis, Grey-Level Nonuniformity, Run Length Nonuniformity,
Run Percentage, Low Grey-Level Run Emphasis, High Grey-Level Run Emphasis, Short Run
Low Grey-Level Emphasis, Short Run High Grey-Level Emphasis, Long Run Low Grey-
Level Emphasis and Long Run High Grey-Level Emphasis. They are provided in this exact
order in the output image. Thus, this application computes the following Haralick textures
over a sliding window with user defined radius: (where p(i, j) is the element in cell i, j of a
normalized Run Length Matrix, nr is the total number of runs and n p is the total number of
pixels):
1 p(i, j)
”Short Run Emphasis” = SRE = nr ∑i, j j2
1
”Long Run Emphasis” = LRE = nr ∑i, j p(i, j) ∗ j2
1

2
”Grey-Level Nonuniformity” = GLN = nr ∑i ∑ j p(i, j)
1 2
”Run Length Nonuniformity” = RLN = nr ∑ j (∑i p(i, j))
nr
”Run Percentage” = RP = np
1 p(i, j)
”Low Grey-Level Run Emphasis” = LGRE = nr ∑i, j i2

”High Grey-Level Run Emphasis” = HGRE = n1r ∑i, j p(i, j) ∗ i2

1 p(i, j)
”Short Run Low Grey-Level Emphasis” = SRLGE = nr ∑i, j i2 j 2
1 p(i, j)∗i2
”Short Run High Grey-Level Emphasis” = SRHGE = nr ∑i, j j2
1 p(i, j)∗ j2
”Long Run Low Grey-Level Emphasis” = LRLGE = nr ∑i, j i2
1
”Long Run High Grey-Level Emphasis” = LRHGE = nr ∑i, j p(i, j)i2 j2

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_HaralickTextureExtraction -in InputImage

-channel 1
-texture simple
-parameters.min 0
80 Chapter 4. Recipes

-parameters.max 255
-out OutputImage

SFS texture extraction

This application computes Structural Feature Set textures on every pixel in the selected channel of
the input image. The output image is multi band with a feature per band. The 6 output texture
features are SFS’Length, SFS’Width, SFS’PSI, SFS’W-Mean, SFS’Ratio and SFS’SD. They are
provided in this exact order in the output image.
It is based on line direction estimation and described in the following publication. Please refer to
Xin Huang, Liangpei Zhang and Pingxiang Li publication, Classification and Extraction of Spa-
tial Features in Urban Areas Using High-Resolution Multispectral Imagery. IEEE Geoscience and
Remote Sensing Letters, vol. 4, n. 2, 2007, pp 260-264.
The texture is computed for each pixel using its neighborhood. User can set the spatial threshold that
is the max line length, the spectral threshold that is the max difference authorized between a pixel
of the line and the center pixel of the current neighborhood. The adjustement constant alpha and the
ratio Maximum Consideration Number, which describes the shape contour around the central pixel,
are used to compute the w − mean value.
The SFSTextureExtraction application has the following input parameters:

• -in the input image to compute the features on

• -channel the selected channel index in the input image to be processed (default value is 1)
• -parameters.spethre the spectral threshold (default value is 50)
• -parameters.spathre the spatial threshold (default value is 100 pixels)

• -parameters.nbdir the number of directions (default value is 20)

• -parameters.alpha the alpha value (default value is 1)
• -parameters.maxcons the ratio Maximum Consideration Number (default value is 5)
• -out the output multi band image containing the selected texture features (one feature per
band)

The application can be used like this:

otbcli_SFSTextureExtraction -in InputImage

-channel 1
-out OutputImage
4.6. Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair 81

4.6 Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair

This section describes how to convert pair of stereo images into elevation information.
The standard problem of terrain reconstruction with available OTB Applications contains the fol-
lowing steps:

• Estimation of displacements grids for epipolar geometry transformation

• Epipolar resampling of the image pair using those grids
• Dense disparity map estimation
• Projection of the disparities on a Digital Surface Model (DSM)

Let’s go to the third dimension!

4.6.1 Estimate epipolar geometry transformation

The aim of this application is to generate resampled grids to transform images in epipolar geometry.
Epipolar geometry is the geometry of stereo vision (see here). The operation of stereo rectification
determines transformations to apply to each image such that pairs of conjugate epipolar lines become
collinear, parallel to one of the image axes and aligned. In this geometry, the objects present on a
given row of the left image are also located on the same line in the right image.
Applying this transformation reduces the problem of elevation (or stereo correspondences determi-
nation) to a 1-D problem. We have two images image1 and image2 over the same area (the stereo
pair) and we assume that we know the localization functions (forward and inverse) associated for
each of these images.
The forward function allows to go from the image referential to the geographic referential:
f orward
(long, lat) = fimage1 (i, j, h) (4.2)

where h is the elevation hypothesis, (i, j) are the pixel coordinates in image1 and (long,lat) are
geographic coordinates. As you can imagine, the inverse function allows to go from geographic
coordinates to the image geometry.
For the second image, in that case, the expression of the inverse function is:

inverse
(long, lat, h) = fimage2 (i, j) (4.3)

Using jointly the forward and inverse functions from the image pair, we can construct a co-
localization function fimage1→image2 between the position of a pixel in the first and its position in
the second one:
82 Chapter 4. Recipes

(iimage2 , jimage2 ) = fimage1→image2 (iimage1 , jimage1 , h) (4.4)

The expression of this function is:

inverse f orward
fimage1→image2 (iimage1 , jimage1 , h) = fimage2 fimage1 ((iimage1 , jimage1 ), h) (4.5)

The expression is not really important, what we need to understand is that if we are able to determine
for a given pixel in image1 the corresponding pixel in image2, as we know the expression of the co-
localization function between both images, we can determine by identification the information about
the elevation (variable h in the equation)!
We now have the mathematical basis to understand how 3-D information can be extracted by exam-
ination of the relative positions of objects in the two 2-D epipolar images.
The construction of the two epipolar grids is a little bit more complicated in the case of VHR optical
images.That is because most of passive remote sensing from space use a push-broom sensor, which
corresponds to a line of sensors arranged perpendicularly to the flight direction of the spacecraft.
This acquisition configuration implies a slightly different strategy for stereo-rectification (see here).
We will now explain how to use the StereoRectificationGridGenerator application to produce two
images which are deformation grids to resample the two images in epipolar geometry.

otbcli_StereoRectificationGridGenerator -io.inleft image1.tif

-io.inright image2.tif
-epi.elevation.avg.value 50
-epi.step 5
-io.outimage1 outimage1_grid.tif
-io.outright outimage1_grid.tif

The application estimates the displacement to apply to each pixel in both input images to obtain
epipolar geometry.The application accept a ‘step’ parameter to estimate displacements on a coarser
grid. Here we estimate the displacements every 10 pixels. This is because in most cases with a
pair of VHR and a small angle between the two images, this grid is very smooth. Moreover, the
implementation is not streamable and uses potentially a lot of memory. Therefore it is generally a
good idea to estimate the displacement grid at a coarser resolution.
The application outputs the size of the output images in epipolar geometry. Note these values, we
will use them in the next step to resample the two images in epipolar geometry.
In our case, we have:

Output parameters value:

epi.rectsizex: 4462
epi.rectsizey: 2951
epi.baseline: 0.2094
4.6. Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair 83

The epi.baseline parameter provides the mean value (in pixels.meters−1 ) of the baseline to sensor
altitude ratio. It can be used to convert disparities to physical elevation, since a disparity of this
value will correspond to an elevation offset of one meter with respect to the mean elevation.
we can now move forward to the resampling in epipolar geometry.

4.6.2 Resample images in epipolar geometry

The former application generates two grids of displacements. The GridBasedImageResampling

allows to resample the two input images in the epipolar geometry using these grids. These grids are
intermediary results not really useful on their own in most cases. This second step only consists in
applying the transformation and resample both images. This application can obviously be used in
lot of other contexts.
The two commands to generate epipolar images are:

otbcli_GridBasedImageResampling -io.in image1.tif

-io.out image1_epipolar.tif
-grid.in outimage1_grid.tif
-out.sizex 4462
-out.sizey 2951

otbcli_GridBasedImageResampling -io.in image2.tif

-io.out image2_epipolar.tif
-grid.in outimage2_grid.tif
-out.sizex 4462
-out.sizey 2951

As you can see, we set sizex and sizey parameters using output values given by the StereoRectifica-
tionGridGenerator application to set the size of the output epipolar images.
We obtain two images in epipolar geometry, as shown in figure 4.17. Note that the application allows
to resample only a part of the image using the -out.ulx and -out.uly parameters.

4.6.3 Disparity estimation: Block matching along epipolar lines

Finally, we can begin the stereo correspondences lookup process!

Things are becoming a little bit more complex but do not worry. First, we will describe the power
of the BlockMatching application.
The resampling of our images in epipolar geometry allows us to constrain the search along a 1-
dimensional line as opposed to both dimensions, but what is even more important is that the dispar-
ities along the lines, i.e. the offset along the lines measured by the block-matching process can be
directly linked to the local elevation
84 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.17: Extract of resample image1 and image2 in epipolar geometry over Pyramids of Cheops.
c CNES
2012

An almost complete spectrum of stereo correspondence algorithms has been published and it is
still augmented at a significant rate! See for example . The Orfeo ToolBox implements different
strategies for block matching:

• Sum of Square Distances block-matching (SSD)

• Normalized Cross-Correlation (NCC)
• Lp pseudo-norm (LP)

An other important parameter (mandatory in the application!) is the range of disparities. In theory,
the block matching can perform a blind exploration and search for a infinite range of disparities
between the stereo pair. We need now to evaluate a range of disparities where the block matching
will be performed (in the general case from the deepest point on Earth, the Challenger Deep. to the
Everest summit!)
We deliberately exaggerated but you can imagine that without a smaller range the block matching
algorithm can take a lot of time. That is why these parameters are mandatory for the application and
as a consequence we need to estimate them manually. This is pretty simple using the two epipolar
images.
In our case, we take one point on a flat area. The image coordinate in image1 is [1970, 1525] and in
image2 is [1970, 1526]. We then select a second point on a higher region (in our case a point near the
top of the Pyramid of Cheops!). The image coordinate of this pixel in image1 is [1661, 1299] and in
image2 is [1633, 1300]. So you see for the horizontal exploration, we must set the minimum value
lower than −30 (the convention for the sign of the disparity range is from image1 to image2).
Note that this estimation can be simplified using an external DEM in the StereoRectificationGrid-
Generator application. Regarding the vertical disparity, in the first step we said that we reduced the
problem of 3-D extraction to a 1-D problem, but this is not completely true in general cases. There
might be small disparities in the vertical direction which are due to parallax errors (i.e. epipolar
4.6. Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair 85

lines exhibit a small shift in the vertical direction, around 1 pixel). In fact, the exploration is typi-
cally smaller along the vertical direction of disparities than along the horizontal one. You can also
estimate them on the epipolar pair (in our case we use a range of −1 to 1).
One more time, take care of the sign of this minimum and this maximum for disparities (always
from image1 to image2).
The command line for the BlockMatching application is :

otbcli_BlockMatching -io.inleft image1_epipolar.tif

-io.inright image2_epipolar.tif
-io.out disparity_map_ncc.tif
-bm.minhd -45
-bm.maxhd 5
-bm.minvd 1
-bm.maxvd 1
-mask.inleft image1_epipolar_mask.tif
-mask.inright image2_epipolar_mask.tif
-io.outmetric 1
-bm.metric ncc
-bm.subpixel dichotomy
-bm.medianfilter.radius 5
-bm.medianfilter.incoherence 2.0

The application creates by default a two bands image : the horizontal and vertical disparities.
The BlockMatching application gives access to a lot of other powerful functionalities to improve the
quality of the output disparity map.
Here are a few of these functionalities:

• -io.outmetric: if the optimal metric values image is activated, it will be concatenated to the
output image (which will then have three bands: horizontal disparity, vertical disparity and
metric value)
• -bm.subpixel: Perform sub-pixel estimation of disparities
• -mask.inleft and -mask.inright: you can specify a no-data value which will discard pixels with
this value (for example the epipolar geometry can generate large part of images with black
pixels) This mask can be easily generated using the BandMath application:

otbcli_BandMath -il image1_epipolar.tif

-out image1_epipolar_mask.tif
-exp "if(im1b1<=0,0,255)"

otbcli_BandMath -il image2_epipolar.tif

86 Chapter 4. Recipes

-out image2_epipolar_mask.tif
-exp "if(im1b1<=0,0,255)"

• -mask.variancet : The block matching algorithm has difficulties to find matches on uniform
areas. We can use the variance threshold to discard those regions and speed-up computation
time.
• -bm.medianfilter.radius 5 and -bm.medianfilter.incoherence 2.0: Applies a median filter to
the disparity map. The median filter belongs to the family of nonlinear filters. It is used to
smooth an image without being biased by outliers or shot noise. The radius corresponds to
the neighbourhood where the median value is computed. A detection of incoherence between
the input disparity map and the median-filtered one is performed (a pixel corresponds to an
incoherence if the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value in the disparity
map and in the median image is higher than the incoherence threshold, whose default value is
1). Both parameters must be defined in the application to activate the filter.

Of course all these parameters can be combined to improve the disparity map.

Figure 4.18: Horizontal disparity and optimal metric map

4.6.4 From disparity to Digital Surface Model

Using the previous application, we evaluated disparities between images. The next (and last!) step
is now to transform the disparity map into an elevation information to produce an elevation map. It
uses as input the disparity maps (horizontal and vertical) to produce a Digital Surface Model (DSM)
with a regular sampling. The elevation values is computed from the triangulation of the ”left-right”
pairs of matched pixels. When several elevations are available on a DSM cell, the highest one is
kept.
First, an important point is that it is often a good idea to rework the disparity map given by the
BlockMatching application to only keep relevant disparities. For this purpose, we can use the output
optimal metric image and filter disparities with respect to this value.
4.6. Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair 87

For example, if we used Normalized Cross-Correlation (NCC), we can keep only disparities where
optimal metric value is superior to 0.9. Disparities below this value can be consider as inaccurate
and will not be used to compute elevation information (the -io.mask parameter can be used for this
purpose).
This filtering can be easily done with OTB Applications.
We first use the BandMath application to filter disparities according to their optimal metric value:

otbcli_BandMath -il disparity_map_ncc.tif

-out thres_hdisparity.tif uint8
-exp "if(im1b3>0.9,255,0)"

Then, we concatenate thresholded disparities using the ConcatenateImages:

otbcli_ConcatenateImages -il thres_hdisparity.tif thres_vdisparity.tif

-out thres_hvdisparity.tif

Now, we can use the DisparityMapToElevationMap application to compute the elevation map from
the filtered disparity maps.

otbcli_DisparityMapToElevationMap -io.in disparity_map_ncc.tif

-io.left image1.tif
-io.right image2.tif
-io.lgrid outimage1_pyramid.tif
-io.rgrid outimage2_pyramid.tif
-io.mask thres_hdisparity.tif
-io.out disparity_map_ssd_to_elevation.tif
-hmin 10
-hmax 400
-elev.default 50

It produces the elevation map projected in WGS84 (EPSG code:4326) over the ground area covered
by the stereo pair. Pixels values are expressed in meters.
This is it ! Figure 4.19 shows the output DEM from the Cheops pair.

4.6.5 One application to rule them all in multi stereo framework scheme

An application has been added to fuse one or multiple stereo reconstruction(s) using all in one
approach : StereoFramework. It computes the DSM from one or several stereo pair. First of all the
user have to choose his input data and defines stereo couples using -input.co string parameter. This
parameter use the following formatting convention ” index0 index1 , index2 index3 , . . . ”, which will
88 Chapter 4. Recipes

Figure 4.19: Extract of the elevation map over Pyramids of Cheops.

create a first couple with image index0 and index1 , a second with image index1 and index2 , and so
on. If left blank images are processed by pairs (which is equivalent as using ” 0 1,2 3,4 5 ” . . . ).
In addition to the usual elevation and projection parameters, main parameters have been splitted in
groups detailled below:

Output : output parameters : DSM resolution, NoData value, Cell Fusion method,
• -output.map : output projection map selection.
• -output.res : Spatial Sampling Distance of the output DSM in meters
• -output.nodata : DSM empty cells are filled with this float value (-32768 by default)
• -output.fusionmethod : Choice of fusion strategy in each DSM cell (max, min, mean,
acc)
• -output.out : Output DSM
• -output.mode : Output DSM extent choice
Stereorect : Direct and inverse stereorectification grid subsampling parameters
• -stereorect.fwdgridstep : Step of the direct deformation grid (in pixels)
• -stereorect.invgridssrate : Sub-sampling of the inverse epipolar grid
BM : Block Matching parameters.
• -bm.metric : Block-matching metric choice (robust SSD, SSD, NCC, Lp Norm)
• -bm.radius : Radius of blocks for matching filter (in pixels, 2 by default)
• -bm.minhoffset : Minimum altitude below the selected elevation source (in meters,
-20.0 by default)
• -bm.maxhoffset : Maximum altitude above the selected elevation source (in meters,
20.0 by default)
4.6. Stereoscopic reconstruction from VHR optical images pair 89

Postproc : Post-Processing parameters

• -postproc.bij : use bijection consistency. Right to Left correlation is computed to
validate Left to Right disparities. If bijection is not found pixel is rejected
• -postproc.med : use median disparities filtering (disabled by default)
• -postproc.metrict : use block matching metric output to discard pixels with low
correlation value (disabled by default, float value)”);
Mask : Compute optional intermediate masks.
• -mask.left : Mask for left input image (must have the same size for all couples)
• -mask.right : Mask for right input image (must have the same size for all couples)
• -mask.variancet : This parameter allows to discard pixels whose local variance is too
small. The size of the neighborhood is given by the radius parameter. (disabledd by
default)

4.6.6 Stereo reconstruction good practices

The parameters -bm.minhoffset and -bm.maxhoffset are used inside the application to derive
the minimum and maximum horizontal disparity exploration, so they have a critical impact on com-
putation time. It is advised to choose an elevation source that is not too far from the DSM you want
to produce (for instance, an SRTM elevation model). Therefore, the altitude from your elevation
source will be already taken into account in the epipolar geometry and the disparities will reveal
the elevation offsets (such as buildings). It allows you to use a smaller exploration range along the
elevation axis, causing a smaller exploration along horizontal disparities and faster computation.
-stereorect.fwdgridstep and -stereorect.invgridssrate have also a deep impact in time
consumption, thus they have to be carefully chosen in case of large image processing.
To reduce time consumption it would be useful to crop all sensor images to the same extent. The
easiest way to do that is to choose an image as reference, and then apply ExtractROI application on
the other sensor images using the fit mode -mode.fit option.

4.6.7 Algorithm outline

The following algorithms are used in the application: For each sensor pair

• Compute the epipolar deformation grids from the stereo pair (direct and inverse)
• Resample into epipolar geometry with BCO interpolator
• Create masks for each epipolar image : remove black borders and resample input masks
• Compute horizontal disparities with a block matching algorithm
90 Chapter 4. Recipes

• Refing Disparities to sub-pixel precision with a dichotomy algorithm

• Apply an optional Median filter
• Filter disparities based on the correlation score (optional) and exploration bounds
• Translate disparities in sensor geometry

• Convert disparity map to 3D map

Then fuse all 3D maps to produce DSM with desired geographic or cartographic projection and
parametrizable extent.
 CHAPTER

FIVE

Applications Reference Documentation

This chapter is the reference documentation for applications delivered with Orfeo ToolBox. It
provides detailed description of the application behaviour and parameters, as well as python and
bash snippets to use them applications. For a general introduction on applications delivered with
Orfeo ToolBox, please read chapter1, page 1.

5.1 Image Manipulation

5.1.1 Color Mapping

Maps an input label image to 8-bits RGB using look-up tables.

Detailed description

This application allows to map a label image to a 8-bits RGB image (in both ways) using different
methods.
-The custom method allows to use a custom look-up table. The look-up table is loaded from a text
file where each line describes an entry. The typical use of this method is to colorise a classification
map.
-The continuous method allows to map a range of values in a scalar input image to a colored image
using continuous look-up table, in order to enhance image interpretation. Several look-up tables can
been chosen with different color ranges.
-The optimal method computes an optimal look-up table. When processing a segmentation label
image (label to color), the color difference between adjacent segmented regions is maximized. When
processing an unknown color image (color to label), all the present colors are mapped to a continuous
label list.
- The support image method uses a color support image to associate an average color to each region.
92 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.1, page 93
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ColorMapping.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
op Choices Operation
op labeltocolor Choice Label to color
op colortolabel Choice Color to label
op.colortolabel.notfound Int Not Found Label
method Choices Color mapping method
method custom Choice Color mapping with custom labeled look-up
table
method continuous Choice Color mapping with continuous look-up ta-
ble
method optimal Choice Compute an optimized look-up table
method image Choice Color mapping with look-up table calculated
on support image
method.custom.lut Input File name Look-up table file
method.continuous.lut Choices Look-up tables
method.continuous.lut red Choice Red
method.continuous.lut green Choice Green
method.continuous.lut blue Choice Blue
method.continuous.lut grey Choice Grey
method.continuous.lut hot Choice Hot
method.continuous.lut cool Choice Cool
method.continuous.lut spring Choice Spring
method.continuous.lut summer Choice Summer
method.continuous.lut autumn Choice Autumn
method.continuous.lut winter Choice Winter
method.continuous.lut copper Choice Copper
method.continuous.lut jet Choice Jet
method.continuous.lut hsv Choice HSV
method.continuous.lut overunder Choice OverUnder
method.continuous.lut relief Choice Relief
method.continuous.min Float Mapping range lower value
method.continuous.max Float Mapping range higher value
method.optimal.background Int Background label
method.image.in Input image Support Image
method.image.nodatavalue Float NoData value
method.image.low Int lower quantile
method.image.up Int upper quantile
.../...
5.1. Image Manipulation 93

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.1: Parameters table for Color Mapping.

Input Image Input image filename

Output Image Output image filename

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Operation Selection of the operation to execute (default is : label to color). Available choices are:

• Label to color
• Color to label
– Not Found Label: Label to use for unknown colors.

Color mapping method Selection of color mapping methods and their parameters. Available
choices are:

• Color mapping with custom labeled look-up table: Apply a user-defined look-up table to a
labeled image. Look-up table is loaded from a text file.
– Look-up table file: An ASCII file containing the look-up table
with one color per line
(for instance the line ’1 255 0 0’ means that all pixels with label 1 will be replaced by
RGB color 255 0 0)
Lines beginning with a # are ignored
• Color mapping with continuous look-up table: Apply a continuous look-up table to a range
of input values.
– Look-up tables: Available look-up tables.
– Mapping range lower value: Set the lower input value of the mapping range.
94 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

– Mapping range higher value: Set the higher input value of the mapping range.
• Compute an optimized look-up table: [label to color] Compute an optimal look-up table
such that neighboring labels in a segmentation are mapped to highly contrasted colors. [color
to label] Searching all the colors present in the image to compute a continuous label list
– Background label: Value of the background label
• Color mapping with look-up table calculated on support image
– Support Image: Support image filename. For each label, the LUT is calculated from
the mean pixel value in the support image, over the corresponding labeled areas. First of
all, the support image is normalized with extrema rejection
– NoData value: NoData value for each channel of the support image, which will not be
handled in the LUT estimation. If NOT checked, ALL the pixel values of the support
image will be handled in the LUT estimation.
– lower quantile: lower quantile for image normalization
– upper quantile: upper quantile for image normalization

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ColorMapping -in ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI . png - method custom - method . custom . lut
ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI_PNG_ColorTable . txt -out
Colorized_ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ColorMapping application

ColorMapping = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ColorMapping ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ColorMapping . SetParameterString (" in " , " ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI . png ")

ColorMapping . SetParameterString (" method " ," custom ")

ColorMapping . SetParameterString (" method . custom . lut " ,

" ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI_PNG_ColorTable . txt ")
5.1. Image Manipulation 95

ColorMapping . SetParameterString (" out " , " Colorized_ROI_QB_MUL_1_SVN_CLASS_MULTI . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

ColorMapping . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

The segmentation optimal method does not support streaming, and thus large images. The operation
color to label is not implemented for the methods continuous LUT and support image LUT.
ColorMapping using support image is not threaded.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• ImageSVMClassifier

5.1.2 Images Concatenation

Concatenate a list of images of the same size into a single multi-channel one.

Detailed description

This application performs images channels concatenation. It will walk the input image list (single
or multi-channel) and generates a single multi-channel image. The channel order is the one of the
list.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.2, page 96
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ConcatenateImages.
96 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input images list
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.2: Parameters table for Images Concatenation.

• Input images list: The list of images to concatenate

• Output Image: The concatenated output image
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ConcatenateImages -il GomaAvant . png GomaApres . png -out otbConcatenateImages . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ConcatenateImages application

ConcatenateImages = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ConcatenateImages ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ConcatenateImages . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ GomaAvant . png ’, ’ GomaApres . png ’])

ConcatenateImages . SetParameterString (" out " , " otbConcatenateImages . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

ConcatenateImages . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

All input images must have the same size.

5.1. Image Manipulation 97

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Rescale application, Convert

5.1.3 Image Conversion

Convert an image to a different format, eventually rescaling the data and/or changing the pixel type.

Detailed description

This application performs an image pixel type conversion (short, ushort, uchar, int, uint, float and
double types are handled). The output image is written in the specified format (ie. that corresponds
to the given extension).
The convertion can include a rescale using the image 2 percent minimum and maximum values. The
rescale can be linear or log2.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.3, page 98
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Convert.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input image
type Choices Rescale type
type none Choice None
type linear Choice Linear
type log2 Choice Log2
type.linear.gamma Float Gamma correction factor
mask Input image Input mask
hcp Group Histogram Cutting Parameters
hcp.high Float High Cut Quantile
hcp.low Float Low Cut Quantile
out Output image Output Image
.../...
98 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.3: Parameters table for Image Conversion.

Input image Input image

Rescale type Transfer function for the rescaling Available choices are:

• None

• Linear
– Gamma correction factor: Gamma correction factor
• Log2

Input mask The masked pixels won’t be used to adapt the dynamic (the mask must have the same
dimensions as the input image)

Histogram Cutting Parameters Parameters to cut the histogram edges before rescaling

• High Cut Quantile: Quantiles to cut from histogram high values before computing min/max
rescaling (in percent, 2 by default)
• Low Cut Quantile: Quantiles to cut from histogram low values before computing min/max
rescaling (in percent, 2 by default)

Output Image Output image

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file
5.1. Image Manipulation 99

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Convert -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif -out otbConvertWithScalingOutput . png uint8 - type
linear

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Convert application

Convert = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Convert ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Convert . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

Convert . SetParameterString (" out " , " otbConvertWithScalingOutput . png ")

Convert . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 1)

Convert . SetParameterString (" type " ," linear ")

# The following line execute the application

Convert . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Rescale

5.1.4 Download or list SRTM tiles related to a set of images

Download or list SRTM tiles related to a set of images

100 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application allows to select the appropriate SRTM tiles that covers a list of images. It builds a
list of the required tiles. Two modes are available: the first one download those tiles from the USGS
SRTM3 website (http://dds.cr.usgs.gov/srtm/version2 1/SRTM3/), the second one list those tiles in
a local directory. In both cases, you need to indicate the directory in which directory tiles will be
download or the location of local SRTM files.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.4, page 100
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is DownloadSRTMTiles.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input images list
mode Choices Download/List corresponding SRTM tiles.
mode download Choice Download
mode list Choice List tiles
mode.download.outdir Directory Output directory
mode.list.indir Directory Input directory
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.4: Parameters table for Download or list SRTM tiles related to a set of images.

Input images list The list of images on which you want to determine corresponding SRTM tiles.

Download/List corresponding SRTM tiles. Available choices are:

• Download: Download corresponding tiles on USGE server.

– Output directory: Directory where zipped tiles will be save. You’ll need to unzip all
tile files before using them in your application.

• List tiles: List tiles in an existing local directory.

– Input directory: Input directory where SRTM tiles can are located.
5.1. Image Manipulation 101

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_DownloadSRTMTiles -il QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif - mode list - mode . list . indir
/home/ user / srtm_dir /

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the DownloadSRTMTiles application

DownloadSRTMTiles = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" DownloadSRTMTiles ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

DownloadSRTMTiles . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ’])

DownloadSRTMTiles . SetParameterString (" mode " ," list ")

DownloadSRTMTiles . SetParameterString (" mode . list . indir " , "/ home / user / srtm_dir /")

# The following line execute the application

DownloadSRTMTiles . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.5 Extract ROI

Extract a ROI defined by the user.

Detailed description

This application extracts a Region Of Interest with user defined size, or reference image.
102 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.5, page 102
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ExtractROI.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
mode Choices Extraction mode
mode standard Choice Standard
mode fit Choice Fit
mode.fit.ref Input image Reference image
mode.fit.elev Group Elevation management
mode.fit.elev.dem Directory DEM directory
mode.fit.elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
mode.fit.elev.default Float Default elevation
startx Int Start X
starty Int Start Y
sizex Int Size X
sizey Int Size Y
cl List Output Image channels
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.5: Parameters table for Extract ROI.

Input Image Input image.

Output Image Output image.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Extraction mode Available choices are:

• Standard: In standard mode, extract is done according the coordinates entered by the user
5.1. Image Manipulation 103

• Fit: In fit mode, extract is made to best fit a reference image.

– Reference image: Reference image to define the ROI
– Elevation management: This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values.
Supported formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application
could be a useful tool to list/download tiles related to a product.
– DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Eleva-
tion Model tiles
– Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no
DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A
version of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-
Data/raw-file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
– Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when
there is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the
DEM tiles, and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an
average elevation value.

Start X ROI start x position.

Start Y ROI start y position.

Size X size along x in pixels.

Size Y size along y in pixels.

Output Image channels Channels to write in the output image.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ExtractROI -in VegetationIndex . hd - startx 40 - starty 250 - sizex 150 - sizey 150 -out
ExtractROI . tif
104 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ExtractROI application

ExtractROI = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ExtractROI ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ExtractROI . SetParameterString (" in " , " VegetationIndex . hd ")

ExtractROI . SetParameterInt (" startx " , 40)

ExtractROI . SetParameterInt (" starty " , 250)

ExtractROI . SetParameterInt (" sizex " , 150)

ExtractROI . SetParameterInt (" sizey " , 150)

ExtractROI . SetParameterString (" out " , " ExtractROI . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

ExtractROI . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.6 Multi Resolution Pyramid

Build a multi-resolution pyramid of the image.

Detailed description

This application builds a multi-resolution pyramid of the input image. User can specified the number
of levels of the pyramid and the subsampling factor. To speed up the process, you can use the fast
scheme option

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.6, page 105
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
5.1. Image Manipulation 105

programming languages. Application key is MultiResolutionPyramid.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
level Int Number Of Levels
sfactor Int Subsampling factor
vfactor Float Variance factor
fast Boolean Use Fast Scheme
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.6: Parameters table for Multi Resolution Pyramid.

• Input Image:
• Output Image: will be used to get the prefix and the extension of the images to write
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Number Of Levels: Number of levels in the pyramid (default is 1).
• Subsampling factor: Subsampling factor between each level of the pyramid (default is 2).
• Variance factor: Variance factor use in smoothing. It is multiplied by the subsampling factor
of each level in the pyramid (default is 0.6).
• Use Fast Scheme: If used, this option allows to speed-up computation by iteratively sub-
sampling previous level of pyramid instead of processing the full input.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_MultiResolutionPyramid -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif -out multiResolutionImage . tif
- level 1 - sfactor 2 - vfactor 0.6 - fast false

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
106 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the MultiResolutionPyramid application

MultiResolutionPyramid = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" MultiResolutionPyramid ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterString (" out " , " multiResolutionImage . tif ")

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterInt (" level " , 1)

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterInt (" sfactor " , 2)

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterFloat (" vfactor " , 0.6)

MultiResolutionPyramid . SetParameterString (" fast " ,"1")

# The following line execute the application

MultiResolutionPyramid . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.7 Quick Look

Generates a subsampled version of an image extract

Detailed description

Generates a subsampled version of an extract of an image defined by ROIStart and ROISize.

This extract is subsampled using the ratio OR the output image Size.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.7, page 107
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Quicklook.
5.1. Image Manipulation 107

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
cl List Channel List
rox Int ROI Origin X
roy Int ROI Origin Y
rsx Int ROI Size X
rsy Int ROI Size Y
sr Int Sampling ratio
sx Int Size X
sy Int Size Y
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.7: Parameters table for Quick Look.

• Input Image: The image to read

• Output Image: The subsampled image

• Channel List: Selected channels
• ROI Origin X: first point of ROI in x-direction

• ROI Origin Y: first point of ROI in y-direction

• ROI Size X: size of ROI in x-direction
• ROI Size Y: size of ROI in y-direction
• Sampling ratio: Sampling Ratio, default is 2

• Size X: quicklook size in x-direction (used if no sampling ration is given)

• Size Y: quicklook size in y-direction (used if no sampling ration is given)
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file

• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
108 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Quicklook -in qb_RoadExtract . tif -out quicklookImage . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Quicklook application

Quicklook = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Quicklook ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Quicklook . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

Quicklook . SetParameterString (" out " , " quicklookImage . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

Quicklook . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

This application does not provide yet the optimal way to decode coarser level of resolution from
JPEG2000 images (like in Monteverdi).
Trying to subsampled huge JPEG200 image with the application will lead to poor performances for
now.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.8 Read image information

Get information about the image

Detailed description

Display information about the input image like: image size, origin, spacing, metadata, projections...
5.1. Image Manipulation 109

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.8, page 110
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ReadImageInfo.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
keywordlist Boolean Display the OSSIM keywordlist
outkwl Output File name Write the OSSIM keywordlist to a geom file
indexx Int Start index X
indexy Int Start index Y
sizex Int Size X
sizey Int Size Y
spacingx Float Pixel Size X
spacingy Float Pixel Size Y
originx Float Image Origin X
originy Float Image Origin Y
estimatedgroundspacingx Float Estimated ground spacing X
estimatedgroundspacingy Float Estimated ground spacing Y
numberbands Int Number Of Bands
sensor String Sensor id
id String Image id
time String Acquisition time
ullat Float Upper left lattitude
ullon Float Upper left longitude
urlat Float Upper right lattitude
urlon Float Upper right longitude
lrlat Float Lower right lattitude
lrlon Float Lower right longitude
lllat Float Lower left lattitude
lllon Float Lower left longitude
town String Nearest town
country String Country
rgb Group Default RGB Display
rgb.r Int Red Band
rgb.g Int Green Band
rgb.b Int Blue Band
projectionref String Projection
keyword String Keywordlist
gcp Group Ground Control Points informations
gcp.count Int GCPs Number
gcp.proj String GCP Projection
gcp.ids String list GCPs Id
gcp.info String list GCPs Info
gcp.imcoord String list GCPs Image Coordinates
.../...
110 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
gcp.geocoord String list GCPs Geographic Coordinates
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.8: Parameters table for Read image information.

Input Image Input image to analyse

Display the OSSIM keywordlist Output the OSSIM keyword list. It contains metadata information
(sensor model, geometry ). Informations are stored in keyword list (pairs of key/value)

Write the OSSIM keywordlist to a geom file This option allows to extract the OSSIM keywordlist
of the image into a geom file.

Start index X X start index

Start index Y Y start index

Size X X size (in pixels)

Size Y Y size (in pixels)

Pixel Size X Pixel size along X (in physical units)

Pixel Size Y Pixel size along Y (in physical units)

Image Origin X Origin along X

Image Origin Y Origin along Y

5.1. Image Manipulation 111

Estimated ground spacing X Estimated ground spacing along X (in meters).

Estimated ground spacing Y Estimated ground spacing along Y (in meters).

Number Of Bands Number of bands

Sensor id Sensor identifier

Image id Image identifier

Acquisition time Acquisition time.

Upper left lattitude Lattitude of the upper left corner.

Upper left longitude Longitude of the upper left corner.

Upper right lattitude Lattitude of the upper right corner.

Upper right longitude Longitude of the upper right corner.

Lower right lattitude Lattitude of the lower right corner.

Lower right longitude Longitude of the lower right corner.

Lower left lattitude Lattitude of the lower left corner.

Lower left longitude Longitude of the lower left corner.

Nearest town Main town near center of image

Country Country of the image

112 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Default RGB Display This group of parameters allows to access to the default rgb composition.

• Red Band: Red band Number

• Green Band: Green band Number

• Blue Band: Blue band Number

Projection Projection Coordinate System

Keywordlist Image keyword list

Ground Control Points informations This group of parameters allows to access to the GCPs infor-
mations.

• GCPs Number: Number of GCPs

• GCP Projection: Projection Coordinate System for GCPs
• GCPs Id: GCPs identifier

• GCPs Info: GCPs Information

• GCPs Image Coordinates: GCPs Image coordinates
• GCPs Geographic Coordinates: GCPs Geographic Coordinates

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ReadImageInfo -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
5.1. Image Manipulation 113

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ReadImageInfo application

ReadImageInfo = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ReadImageInfo ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ReadImageInfo . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

ReadImageInfo . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.9 Rescale Image

Rescale the image between two given values.

Detailed description

This application scales the given image pixel intensity between two given values. By default min
(resp. max) value is set to 0 (resp. 255).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.9, page 114
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Rescale.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
.../...
114 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
outmin Float Output min value
outmax Float Output max value
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.9: Parameters table for Rescale Image.

• Input Image: The image to scale.

• Output Image: The rescaled image filename.
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Output min value: Minimum value of the output image.
• Output max value: Maximum value of the output image.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Rescale -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif -out rescaledImage . png uchar - outmin 0 - outmax
255

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Rescale application

Rescale = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Rescale ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Rescale . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

Rescale . SetParameterString (" out " , " rescaledImage . png ")

Rescale . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 1)

Rescale . SetParameterFloat (" outmin " , 0)

5.1. Image Manipulation 115

Rescale . SetParameterFloat (" outmax " , 255)

# The following line execute the application

Rescale . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.10 Split Image

Split a N multiband image into N images

Detailed description

This application splits a N-bands image into N mono-band images. The output images filename will
be generated from the output parameter. Thus if the input image has 2 channels, and the user has set
an output outimage.tif, the generated images will be outimage 0.tif and outimage 1.tif

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.10, page 116
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is SplitImage.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
116 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Figure 5.10: Parameters table for Split Image.

• Input Image: Input multiband image filename.

• Output Image: Output filename that will be used to get the prefix and the extension of the
output images to write
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_SplitImage -in VegetationIndex . hd -out splittedImage . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the SplitImage application

SplitImage = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" SplitImage ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

SplitImage . SetParameterString (" in " , " VegetationIndex . hd ")

SplitImage . SetParameterString (" out " , " splittedImage . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

SplitImage . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.1.11 Image Tile Fusion

Fusion of an image made of several tile files.

5.1. Image Manipulation 117

Detailed description

Concatenate several tile files into a single image file.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.11, page 117
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is TileFusion.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input Tile Images
cols Int Number of tile columns
rows Int Number of tile rows
out Output image Output Image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.11: Parameters table for Image Tile Fusion.

• Input Tile Images: Input tiles to concatenate (in lexicographic order : (0,0) (1,0) (0,1) (1,1)).

• Number of tile columns: Number of columns in the tile array

• Number of tile rows: Number of rows in the tile array
• Output Image: Output entire image
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file

• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_TileFusion -il Scene_R1C1 . tif Scene_R1C2 . tif Scene_R2C1 . tif Scene_R2C2 . tif - cols 2
- rows 2 -out EntireImage . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
118 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the TileFusion application

TileFusion = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" TileFusion ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

TileFusion . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ Scene_R1C1 . tif ’, ’ Scene_R1C2 . tif ’,
’ Scene_R2C1 . tif ’, ’ Scene_R2C2 . tif ’])

TileFusion . SetParameterInt (" cols " , 2)

TileFusion . SetParameterInt (" rows " , 2)

TileFusion . SetParameterString (" out " , " EntireImage . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

TileFusion . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.2 Vector Data Manipulation

5.2.1 Concatenate

Concatenate VectorDatas

Detailed description

This application concatenates a list of VectorData to produce a unique VectorData as output.Note

that the VectorDatas must be of the same type (Storing polygons only, lines only, or points only)

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.12, page 119
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 119

programming languages. Application key is ConcatenateVectorData.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

vd Input vector data list Input VectorDatas to concatenate
out Output vector data Concatenated VectorData
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.12: Parameters table for Concatenate.

• Input VectorDatas to concatenate: VectorData files to be concatenated in an unique Vec-

torData

• Concatenated VectorData: Output conctenated VectorData

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ConcatenateVectorData -vd ToulousePoints - examples . shp ToulouseRoad - examples . shp -out
ConcatenatedVectorData . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ConcatenateVectorData application

ConcatenateVectorData = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ConcatenateVectorData ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ConcatenateVectorData . SetParameterStringList (" vd " , [ ’ ToulousePoints - examples . shp ’,
’ ToulouseRoad - examples . shp ’])

ConcatenateVectorData . SetParameterString (" out " , " ConcatenatedVectorData . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

ConcatenateVectorData . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
120 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.2.2 Rasterization

Rasterize a vector dataset.

Detailed description

This application allows to reproject and rasterize a vector dataset. The grid of the rasterized output
can be set by using a reference image, or by setting all parmeters (origin, size, spacing) by hand.
In the latter case, at least the spacing (ground sampling distance) is needed (other parameters are
computed automatically). The rasterized output can also be in a different projection reference system
than the input dataset.
There are two rasterize mode available in the application. The first is the binary mode: it allows to
render all pixels belonging to a geometry of the input dataset in the foreground color, while rendering
the other in background color. The second one allows to render pixels belonging to a geometry woth
respect to an attribute of this geometry. The field of the attribute to render can be set by the user. In
the second mode, the background value is still used for unassociated pixels.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.13, page 121
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Rasterization.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input File name Input vector dataset
out Output image Ouptut image
im Input image Input reference image
szx Int Output size x
szy Int Output size y
epsg Int Output EPSG code
orx Float Output Upper-left x
ory Float Output Upper-left y
.../...
5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 121

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
spx Float Spacing (GSD) x
spy Float Spacing (GSD) y
background Float Background value
mode Choices Rasterization mode
mode binary Choice Binary mode
mode attribute Choice Attribute burning mode
mode.binary.foreground Float Foreground value
mode.attribute.field String The attribute field to burn
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.13: Parameters table for Rasterization.

Input vector dataset The input vector dataset to be rasterized

Ouptut image An output image containing the rasterized vector dataset

Input reference image A reference image from which to import output grid and projection refer-
ence system information.

Output size x Output size along x axis (useless if support image is given)

Output size y Output size along y axis (useless if support image is given)

Output EPSG code EPSG code for the output projection reference system (EPSG 4326 for
WGS84, 32631 for UTM31N...,useless if support image is given)

Output Upper-left x Output upper-left x coordinate (useless if support image is given)

Output Upper-left y Output upper-left y coordinate (useless if support image is given)

122 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Spacing (GSD) x Spacing (ground sampling distance) along x axis (useless if support image is
given)

Spacing (GSD) y Spacing (ground sampling distance) along y axis (useless if support image is
given)

Background value Default value for pixels not belonging to any geometry

Rasterization mode Choice of rasterization modes Available choices are:

• Binary mode: In this mode, pixels within a geometry will hold the user-defined foreground
value
– Foreground value: Value for pixels inside a geometry
• Attribute burning mode: In this mode, pixels within a geometry will hold the value of a
user-defined field extracted from this geometry.
– The attribute field to burn: Name of the attribute field to burn

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Rasterization -in qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp -out rasterImage . tif -spx 1. -spy
1.

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Rasterization application

Rasterization = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Rasterization ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 123

Rasterization . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp ")

Rasterization . SetParameterString (" out " , " rasterImage . tif ")

Rasterization . SetParameterFloat (" spx " , 1.)

Rasterization . SetParameterFloat (" spy " , 1.)

# The following line execute the application

Rasterization . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• For now, support of input dataset with multiple layers having different projection reference
system is limited.

5.2.3 VectorData Extract ROI

Perform an extract ROI on the input vector data according to the input image extent

Detailed description

This application extracts the vector data features belonging to a region specified by the support
image envelope

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.14, page 124
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VectorDataExtractROIApplication.
124 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.vd Input vector data Input Vector data
io.in Input image Support image
io.out Output vector data Output Vector data
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.14: Parameters table for VectorData Extract ROI.

Input and output data Group containing input and output parameters

• Input Vector data: Input vector data

• Support image: Support image that specifies the extracted region
• Output Vector data: Output extracted vector data

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file
5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 125

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VectorDataExtractROIApplication -io .in qb_RoadExtract . tif -io . vd
qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp -io . out apTvUtVectorDataExtractROIApplicationTest . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VectorDataExtractROIApplication application

VectorDataExtractROIApplication =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VectorDataExtractROIApplication ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VectorDataExtractROIApplication . SetParameterString (" io . in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

VectorDataExtractROIApplication . SetParameterString (" io . vd " ,

" qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp ")

VectorDataExtractROIApplication . SetParameterString (" io . out " ,

" apTvUtVectorDataExtractROIApplicationTest . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

VectorDataExtractROIApplication . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.2.4 Vector Data reprojection

This application allows to reproject a vector data using support image projection reference, or a
user specified map projection
126 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application allows to reproject a vector data using support image projection reference, or a user
given map projection.
If given, image keywordlist can be added to reprojected vectordata.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.15, page 126
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VectorDataReprojection.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Group Input data
in.vd Input File name Input vector data
in.kwl Input image Use image keywords list
out Group Output data
out.vd Output File name Output vector data
out.proj Choices Output Projection choice
out.proj image Choice Use image projection ref
out.proj user Choice User defined projection
out.proj.image.in Input image Image used to get projection map
out.proj.user.map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
out.proj.user.map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
out.proj.user.map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
out.proj.user.map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
out.proj.user.map wgs Choice WGS 84
out.proj.user.map epsg Choice EPSG Code
out.proj.user.map.utm.zone Int Zone number
out.proj.user.map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
out.proj.user.map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.15: Parameters table for Vector Data reprojection.

5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 127

Input data

• Input vector data: The input vector data to reproject

• Use image keywords list: Optional input image to fill vector data with image kwl.

Output data

• Output vector data: The reprojected vector data

• Output Projection choice:
Available choices are:
– Use image projection ref: Vector data will be reprojected in image projection ref.
∗ Image used to get projection map: Projection map will be found using image
metadata
– User defined projection
∗ Output Cartographic Map Projection: Parameters of the output map projection
to be used.
∗ Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the
transverse mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
∗ Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their
zone number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in
the northern hemisphere.
∗ EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.
128 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VectorDataReprojection -in. vd VectorData_QB1 . shp -out . proj image -out . proj . image .in
ROI_QB_MUL_1 . tif -out . vd reprojected_vd . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VectorDataReprojection application

VectorDataReprojection = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VectorDataReprojection ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VectorDataReprojection . SetParameterString (" in . vd " , " VectorData_QB1 . shp ")

VectorDataReprojection . SetParameterString (" out . proj " ," image ")

VectorDataReprojection . SetParameterString (" out . proj . image . in " , " ROI_QB_MUL_1 . tif ")

VectorDataReprojection . SetParameterString (" out . vd " , " reprojected_vd . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

VectorDataReprojection . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.2.5 Vector data set field

Set a field in vector data.

Detailed description

Set a specified field to a specified value on all features of a vector data.

5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 129

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.16, page 129
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VectorDataSetField.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input vector data Input
out Output vector data Output
fn String Field
fv String Value
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.16: Parameters table for Vector data set field.

• Input: Input Vector Data

• Output: Output Vector Data
• Field: Field name
• Value: Field value
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VectorDataSetField -in qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp -out VectorDataSetField . shp
-fn Info -fv Sample polygon

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VectorDataSetField application

VectorDataSetField = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VectorDataSetField ")
130 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VectorDataSetField . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract_classification . shp ")

VectorDataSetField . SetParameterString (" out " , " VectorDataSetField . shp ")

VectorDataSetField . SetParameterString (" fn " , " Info ")

VectorDataSetField . SetParameterString (" fv " , " Sample polygon ")

# The following line execute the application

VectorDataSetField . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Doesn’t work with KML files yet

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.2.6 Vector Data Transformation

Apply a transform to each vertex of the input VectorData

Detailed description

This application performs a transformation of an input vector data transforming each vertex in the
vector data. The applied transformation manages translation, rotation and scale, and can be centered
or not.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.17, page 131
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VectorDataTransform.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

vd Input vector data Input Vector data
out Output vector data Output Vector data
in Input image Support image
transform Group Transform parameters
.../...
5.2. Vector Data Manipulation 131

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
transform.tx Float Translation X
transform.ty Float Translation Y
transform.ro Float Rotation Angle
transform.centerx Float Center X
transform.centery Float Center Y
transform.scale Float Scale
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.17: Parameters table for Vector Data Transformation.

Input Vector data Input vector data to transform

Output Vector data Output transformed vector data

Support image Image needed as a support to the vector data

Transform parameters Group of parameters to define the transform

• Translation X: Translation in the X direction (in pixels)

• Translation Y: Translation in the Y direction (in pixels)

• Rotation Angle: Angle of the rotation to apply in degrees
• Center X: X coordinate of the rotation center (in physical units)
• Center Y: Y coordinate of the rotation center (in physical units)

• Scale: The scale to apply

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file
132 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VectorDataTransform -vd qb_RoadExtract_easyClassification . shp -in qb_RoadExtract . tif
-out VectorDataTransform . shp - transform . ro 5

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VectorDataTransform application

VectorDataTransform = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VectorDataTransform ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VectorDataTransform . SetParameterString (" vd " , " qb_RoadExtract_easyClassification . shp ")

VectorDataTransform . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

VectorDataTransform . SetParameterString (" out " , " VectorDataTransform . shp ")

VectorDataTransform . SetParameterFloat (" transform . ro " , 5)

# The following line execute the application

VectorDataTransform . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.3 Calibration

5.3.1 Optical calibration

Perform optical calibration TOA/TOC (Top Of Atmosphere/Top Of Canopy). Supported sensors:

QuickBird, Ikonos, WorldView2, Formosat, Spot5, Pleiades
5.3. Calibration 133

Detailed description

The application allows to convert pixel values from DN (for Digital Numbers) to physically inter-
pretable and comparable values. Calibrated values are called surface reflectivity and its values lie in
the range [0, 1].
The first level is called Top Of Atmosphere (TOA) reflectivity. It takes into account the sensor gain,
sensor spectral response and the solar illumination.
The second level is called Top Of Canopy (TOC) reflectivity. In addition to sensor gain and solar
illumination, it takes into account the optical thickness of the atmosphere, the atmospheric pressure,
the water vapor amount, the ozone amount, as well as the composition and amount of aerosol gasses.
It is also possible to indicate an AERONET file which contains atmospheric parameters (version 1
and version 2 of Aeronet file are supported.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.18, page 134
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is OpticalCalibration.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input
out Output image Output
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
level Choices Calibration Level
level toa Choice TOA : Top Of Atmosphere
level toc Choice TOC : Top Of Canopy (EXPERIMENTAL)
milli Boolean Convert to milli reflectance
clamp Boolean Clamp of reflectivity values between [0,
100]
rsr Input File name Relative Spectral Response File
atmo Group Atmospheric parameters
atmo.aerosol Choices Aerosol Model
atmo.aerosol noaersol Choice No Aerosol Model
atmo.aerosol continental Choice Continental
atmo.aerosol maritime Choice Maritime
atmo.aerosol urban Choice Urban
atmo.aerosol desertic Choice Desertic
atmo.oz Float Ozone Amount
atmo.wa Float Water Vapor Amount
atmo.pressure Float Atmospheric Pressure
atmo.opt Float Aerosol Optical Thickness
atmo.aeronet Input File name Aeronet File
radius Int Window radius
.../...
134 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.18: Parameters table for Optical calibration.

Input Input image filename (values in DN)

Output Output calibrated image filename

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Calibration Level Available choices are:

• TOA : Top Of Atmosphere

• TOC : Top Of Canopy (EXPERIMENTAL)

Convert to milli reflectance Flag to use milli-reflectance instead of reflectance.

This allows to save the image with integer pixel type (in the range [0, 1000] instead of floating point
in the range [0, 1]. In order to do that, use this option and set the output pixel type (-out filename
uint16 for example)

Clamp of reflectivity values between [0, 100] Clamping in the range [0, 100]. It can be useful to
preserve area with specular reflectance.

Relative Spectral Response File Sensor relative spectral response file

By default the application gets these informations in the metadata

Atmospheric parameters This group allows to set the atmospheric parameters.

• Aerosol Model:
Available choices are:
5.3. Calibration 135

– No Aerosol Model
– Continental
– Maritime
– Urban
– Desertic
• Ozone Amount: Ozone Amount
• Water Vapor Amount: Water Vapor Amount (in saturation fraction of water)
• Atmospheric Pressure: Atmospheric Pressure (in hPa)
• Aerosol Optical Thickness: Aerosol Optical Thickness
• Aeronet File: Aeronet file containing atmospheric parameters

Window radius Window radius for adjacency effects corrections

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_OpticalCalibration -in QB_1_ortho . tif - level toa -out OpticalCalibration . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the OpticalCalibration application

OpticalCalibration = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" OpticalCalibration ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

OpticalCalibration . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_1_ortho . tif ")

OpticalCalibration . SetParameterString (" level " ," toa ")

OpticalCalibration . SetParameterString (" out " , " OpticalCalibration . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

OpticalCalibration . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
136 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• The OTB CookBook

5.3.2 SAR Radiometric calibration

Perform SAR calibration on input complex images

Detailed description

This application performs SAR calibration on input complex images.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.19, page 137
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is SarRadiometricCalibration.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Complex Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
noise Boolean Disable Noise
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
5.3. Calibration 137

Figure 5.19: Parameters table for SAR Radiometric calibration.

• Input Complex Image: Input complex image

• Output Image: Output calibrated complex image
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)

• Disable Noise: Flag to disable noise

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_SarRadiometricCalibration -in RSAT_imagery_HH . tif -out SarRadiometricCalibration . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the SarRadiometricCalibration application

SarRadiometricCalibration =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" SarRadiometricCalibration ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

SarRadiometricCalibration . SetParameterString (" in " , " RSAT_imagery_HH . tif ")

SarRadiometricCalibration . SetParameterString (" out " , " SarRadiometricCalibration . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

SarRadiometricCalibration . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

138 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

5.4 Geometry

5.4.1 Bundle to perfect sensor

Perform P+XS pansharpening

Detailed description

This application performs P+XS pansharpening.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.20, page 138
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is BundleToPerfectSensor.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

inp Input image Input PAN Image
inxs Input image Input XS Image
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
lms Float Spacing of the deformation field
out Output image Output image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.20: Parameters table for Bundle to perfect sensor.

Input PAN Image Input panchromatic image.

Input XS Image Input XS image.

5.4. Geometry 139

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).

• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Spacing of the deformation field Spacing of the deformation field. Default is 10 times the PAN
image spacing.

Output image Output image.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_BundleToPerfectSensor -inp QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif - inxs QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif
-out BundleToPerfectSensor . png uchar

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the BundleToPerfectSensor application

140 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

BundleToPerfectSensor = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" BundleToPerfectSensor ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

BundleToPerfectSensor . SetParameterString (" inp " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

BundleToPerfectSensor . SetParameterString (" inxs " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

BundleToPerfectSensor . SetParameterString (" out " , " BundleToPerfectSensor . png ")

BundleToPerfectSensor . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 1)

# The following line execute the application

BundleToPerfectSensor . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.4.2 Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion

Convert cartographic coordinates to geographic one.

Detailed description

This application computes the geographic coordinates from a cartographic one. User has
to give the X and Y coordinate and the cartographic projection (UTM/LAMBERT/LAM-
BERT2/LAMBERT93/SINUS/ECKERT4/TRANSMERCATOR/MOLLWEID/SVY21).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.21, page 141
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ConvertCartoToGeoPoint.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

carto Group Input cartographic coordinates
carto.x Float X cartographic coordinates
carto.y Float Y cartographic coordinates
mapproj Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
.../...
5.4. Geometry 141

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
mapproj utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
mapproj lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
mapproj lambert93 Choice Lambert93
mapproj wgs Choice WGS 84
mapproj epsg Choice EPSG Code
mapproj.utm.zone Int Zone number
mapproj.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
mapproj.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
long Float Output long
lat Float Output lat
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.21: Parameters table for Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion.

Input cartographic coordinates

• X cartographic coordinates: X cartographic coordinates in the specified projection.

• Y cartographic coordinates: Y cartographic coordinates in the specified projection.

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.
– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.
• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.
• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection
142 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;
– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to
your projection

Output long Point longitude coordinates.

Output lat Point latitude coordinates.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ConvertCartoToGeoPoint - carto .x 367074.625 - carto .y 4835740 - mapproj utm
- mapproj . utm . northhem true - mapproj . utm . zone 31

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ConvertCartoToGeoPoint application

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ConvertCartoToGeoPoint ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" carto .x" , 367074.625)

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" carto .y" , 4835740)

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . SetParameterString (" mapproj " ," utm ")

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . SetParameterString (" mapproj . utm . northhem " ,"1")

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . SetParameterInt (" mapproj . utm . zone " , 31)

# The following line execute the application

ConvertCartoToGeoPoint . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
5.4. Geometry 143

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.4.3 Convert Sensor Point To Geographic Point

Sensor to geographic coordinates conversion.

Detailed description

This Application converts a sensor point of an input image to a geographic point using the Forward
Sensor Model of the input image.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.22, page 143
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ConvertSensorToGeoPoint.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Sensor image
input Group Point Coordinates
input.idx Float X value of desired point
input.idy Float Y value of desired point
output Group Geographic Coordinates
output.idx Float Output Point Longitude
output.idy Float Output Point Latitude
output.town String Main town near the coordinates computed
output.country String Country of the image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.22: Parameters table for Convert Sensor Point To Geographic Point.
144 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Sensor image Input sensor image.

Point Coordinates

• X value of desired point: X coordinate of the point to transform.

• Y value of desired point: Y coordinate of the point to transform.

Geographic Coordinates

• Output Point Longitude: Output point longitude coordinate.

• Output Point Latitude: Output point latitude coordinate.
• Main town near the coordinates computed: Nearest main town of the computed geo-
graphic point.
• Country of the image: Country of the input image

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ConvertSensorToGeoPoint -in QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif - input . idx 200
- input . idy 200

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ConvertSensorToGeoPoint application

ConvertSensorToGeoPoint = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ConvertSensorToGeoPoint ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ConvertSensorToGeoPoint . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif ")

ConvertSensorToGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" input . idx " , 200)

ConvertSensorToGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" input . idy " , 200)

# The following line execute the application

ConvertSensorToGeoPoint . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
5.4. Geometry 145

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• ConvertCartoToGeoPoint application, otbObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint

5.4.4 Ply 3D files generation

Generate a 3D Ply file from a DEM and a color image.

Detailed description

Generate a 3D Ply file from a DEM and a color image.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.23, page 146
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is GeneratePlyFile.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

indem Input image The input DEM
mode Choices Conversion Mode
mode dem Choice DEM
mode 3dgrid Choice 3D grid
map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
map wgs Choice WGS 84
map epsg Choice EPSG Code
.../...
146 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
map.utm.zone Int Zone number
map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
incolor Input image The input color image
out Output File name The output Ply file
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.23: Parameters table for Ply 3D files generation.

The input DEM The input DEM

Conversion Mode Available choices are:

• DEM: DEM conversion mode

• 3D grid: 3D grid conversion mode

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.
– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.
• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.
• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection
• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;
5.4. Geometry 147

– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to

your projection

The input color image The input color image

The output Ply file The output Ply file

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_GeneratePlyFile - indem image_dem . tif -out out . ply - incolor image_color . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the GeneratePlyFile application

GeneratePlyFile = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" GeneratePlyFile ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

GeneratePlyFile . SetParameterString (" indem " , " image_dem . tif ")

GeneratePlyFile . SetParameterString (" out " , " out . ply ")

GeneratePlyFile . SetParameterString (" incolor " , " image_color . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

GeneratePlyFile . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.4.5 Generate a RPC sensor model

Generate a RPC sensor model from a list of Ground Control Points.

148 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application generates a RPC sensor model from a list of Ground Control Points. At least
20 points are required for estimation wihtout elevation support, and 40 points for estimation with
elevation support. Elevation support will be automatically deactivated if an insufficient amount of
points is provided. The application can optionnaly output a file containing accuracy statistics for
each point, and a vector file containing segments represening points residues. The map projection
parameter allows to define a map projection in which the accuracy is evaluated.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.24, page 148
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is GenerateRPCSensorModel.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

outgeom Output File name Output geom file
inpoints Input File name Input file containing tie points
outstat Output File name Output file containing output precision
statistics
outvector Output File name Output vector file with residues
map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
map wgs Choice WGS 84
map epsg Choice EPSG Code
map.utm.zone Int Zone number
map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.24: Parameters table for Generate a RPC sensor model.

Output geom file Geom file containing the generated RPC sensor model
5.4. Geometry 149

Input file containing tie points. Points are stored in following format:
Input file containing tie points
row col lon lat. Line beginning with # are ignored.

Output file containing output precision statistics Output file containing the following info:
ref lon ref lat elevation predicted lon predicted lat x error ref(meters) y error ref(meters)
global error ref(meters) x error(meters) y error(meters) overall error(meters)

Output vector file with residues File containing segments representing residues

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.

– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.

• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.
• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection
• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;
– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to
your projection

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
150 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_GenerateRPCSensorModel - outgeom output . geom - inpoints points . txt -map epsg
-map . epsg . code 32631

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the GenerateRPCSensorModel application

GenerateRPCSensorModel = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" GenerateRPCSensorModel ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

GenerateRPCSensorModel . SetParameterString (" outgeom " , " output . geom ")

GenerateRPCSensorModel . SetParameterString (" inpoints " , " points . txt ")

GenerateRPCSensorModel . SetParameterString (" map " ," epsg ")

GenerateRPCSensorModel . SetParameterInt (" map . epsg . code " , 32631)

# The following line execute the application

GenerateRPCSensorModel . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None
5.4. Geometry 151

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• OrthoRectication,HomologousPointsExtraction,RefineSensorModel

5.4.6 Grid Based Image Resampling

Resamples an image according to a resampling grid

Detailed description

This application allows to perform image resampling from an input resampling grid.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.25, page 152
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is GridBasedImageResampling.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.in Input image Input image
io.out Output image Output Image
grid Group Resampling grid parameters
grid.in Input image Input resampling grid
grid.type Choices Grid Type
grid.type def Choice Displacement grid: G(xo ut, yo ut) = (xi n −
xo ut, yi n − yo ut)
grid.type loc Choice Localisation grid: G(xo ut, yo ut) = (xi n, yi n)
out Group Output Image parameters
out.ulx Float Upper Left X
out.uly Float Upper Left Y
out.sizex Int Size X
out.sizey Int Size Y
out.spacingx Float Pixel Size X
.../...
152 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
out.spacingy Float Pixel Size Y
out.default Float Default value
interpolator Choices Interpolation
interpolator nn Choice Nearest Neighbor interpolation
interpolator linear Choice Linear interpolation
interpolator bco Choice Bicubic interpolation
interpolator.bco.radius Int Radius for bicubic interpolation
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.25: Parameters table for Grid Based Image Resampling.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set the input and output images.

• Input image: The input image to resample

• Output Image: The resampled output image

Resampling grid parameters

• Input resampling grid: The resampling grid

• Grid Type: Allows to choose between two grid types

Available choices are:
– Displacement grid: G(x out, y out) = (x in − x out, y in − y out): A deformation
grid contains at each grid position the offset to apply to this position in order to get to
the corresponding point in the input image to resample
– Localisation grid: G(x out, y out) = (x in, y in): A localisation grid contains at each
grid position the corresponding position in the input image to resample

Output Image parameters Parameters of the output image

• Upper Left X: X Coordinate of the upper-left pixel of the output resampled image

• Upper Left Y: Y Coordinate of the upper-left pixel of the output resampled image
5.4. Geometry 153

• Size X: Size of the output resampled image along X (in pixels)

• Size Y: Size of the output resampled image along Y (in pixels)
• Pixel Size X: Size of each pixel along X axis
• Pixel Size Y: Size of each pixel along Y axis

• Default value: The default value to give to pixel that falls outside of the input image.

Interpolation This group of parameters allows to define how the input image will be interpolated
during resampling. Available choices are:

• Nearest Neighbor interpolation: Nearest neighbor interpolation leads to poor image quality,
but it is very fast.

• Linear interpolation: Linear interpolation leads to average image quality but is quite fast
• Bicubic interpolation
– Radius for bicubic interpolation: This parameter allows to control the size of the
bicubic interpolation filter. If the target pixel size is higher than the input pixel size,
increasing this parameter will reduce aliasing artefacts.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_GridBasedImageResampling -io .in ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub . tif -io . out
ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub_resampled . tif uint8 - grid .in
ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub_deformation_field . tif -out . sizex 256 -out . sizey 256 - grid . type
def

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication
154 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

# The following line creates an instance of the GridBasedImageResampling application

GridBasedImageResampling =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" GridBasedImageResampling ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterString (" io . in " , " ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub . tif ")

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterString (" io . out " ,

" ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub_resampled . tif ")
GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" io . out " , 1)

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterString (" grid . in " ,

" ROI_IKO_PAN_LesHalles_sub_deformation_field . tif ")

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterInt (" out . sizex " , 256)

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterInt (" out . sizey " , 256)

GridBasedImageResampling . SetParameterString (" grid . type " ," def ")

# The following line execute the application

GridBasedImageResampling . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbStereorecificationGridGeneration

5.4.7 Image Envelope

Extracts an image envelope.

Detailed description

Build a vector data containing the polygon of the image envelope.

5.4. Geometry 155

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.26, page 155
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ImageEnvelope.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output vector data Output Vector Data
sr Int Sampling Rate
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
proj String Projection
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.26: Parameters table for Image Envelope.

Input Image Input image.

Output Vector Data Vector data file containing the envelope

Sampling Rate Sampling rate for image edges (in pixel)

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
156 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Projection Projection to be used to compute the envelope (default is WGS84)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ImageEnvelope -in QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif -out ImageEnvelope . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ImageEnvelope application

ImageEnvelope = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ImageEnvelope ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ImageEnvelope . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif ")

ImageEnvelope . SetParameterString (" out " , " ImageEnvelope . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

ImageEnvelope . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.4. Geometry 157

5.4.8 Ortho-rectification

This application allows to ortho-rectify optical images from supported sensors.

Detailed description

An inverse sensor model is built from the input image metadata to convert geographical to raw ge-
ometry coordinates. This inverse sensor model is then combined with the chosen map projection to
build a global coordinate mapping grid. Last, this grid is used to resample using the chosen interpo-
lation algorithm. A Digital Elevation Model can be specified to account for terrain deformations.
In case of SPOT5 images, the sensor model can be approximated by an RPC model in order to
speed-up computation.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.27, page 158
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is OrthoRectification.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.in Input image Input Image
io.out Output image Output Image
map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
map wgs Choice WGS 84
map epsg Choice EPSG Code
map.utm.zone Int Zone number
map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
outputs Group Output Image Grid
outputs.mode Choices Parameters estimation modes
outputs.mode auto Choice User Defined
outputs.mode autosize Choice Automatic Size from Spacing
outputs.mode autospacing Choice Automatic Spacing from Size
outputs.mode outputroi Choice Automatic Size from Spacing and output
corners
outputs.mode orthofit Choice Fit to ortho
outputs.ulx Float Upper Left X
.../...
158 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
outputs.uly Float Upper Left Y
outputs.sizex Int Size X
outputs.sizey Int Size Y
outputs.spacingx Float Pixel Size X
outputs.spacingy Float Pixel Size Y
outputs.lrx Float Lower right X
outputs.lry Float Lower right Y
outputs.ortho Input image Model ortho-image
outputs.isotropic Boolean Force isotropic spacing by default
outputs.default Float Default pixel value
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
interpolator Choices Interpolation
interpolator bco Choice Bicubic interpolation
interpolator nn Choice Nearest Neighbor interpolation
interpolator linear Choice Linear interpolation
interpolator.bco.radius Int Radius for bicubic interpolation
opt Group Speed optimization parameters
opt.rpc Int RPC modeling (points per axis)
opt.ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
opt.gridspacing Float Resampling grid spacing
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.27: Parameters table for Ortho-rectification.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set the input and output images.

• Input Image: The input image to ortho-rectify

• Output Image: The ortho-rectified output image

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.
5.4. Geometry 159

– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.

• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.
• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection
• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;
– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to
your projection

Output Image Grid This group of parameters allows to define the grid on which the input image
will be resampled.

• Parameters estimation modes:

Available choices are:
– User Defined: This mode allows you to fully modify default values.
– Automatic Size from Spacing: This mode allows you to automatically compute the
optimal image size from given spacing (pixel size) values
– Automatic Spacing from Size: This mode allows you to automatically compute the
optimal image spacing (pixel size) from the given size
– Automatic Size from Spacing and output corners: This mode allows you to automat-
ically compute the optimal image size from spacing (pixel size) and output corners
– Fit to ortho: Fit the size, origin and spacing to an existing ortho image (uses the value
of outputs.ortho)
• Upper Left X: Cartographic X coordinate of upper-left corner (meters for cartographic pro-
jections, degrees for geographic ones)

• Upper Left Y: Cartographic Y coordinate of the upper-left corner (meters for cartographic
projections, degrees for geographic ones)
• Size X: Size of projected image along X (in pixels)
• Size Y: Size of projected image along Y (in pixels)
160 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Pixel Size X: Size of each pixel along X axis (meters for cartographic projections, degrees
for geographic ones)
• Pixel Size Y: Size of each pixel along Y axis (meters for cartographic projections, degrees
for geographic ones)

• Lower right X: Cartographic X coordinate of the lower-right corner (meters for cartographic
projections, degrees for geographic ones)
• Lower right Y: Cartographic Y coordinate of the lower-right corner (meters for cartographic
projections, degrees for geographic ones)
• Model ortho-image: A model ortho-image that can be used to compute size, origin and
spacing of the output
• Force isotropic spacing by default: Default spacing (pixel size) values are estimated from
the sensor modeling of the image. It can therefore result in a non-isotropic spacing. This
option allows you to force default values to be isotropic (in this case, the minimum of spacing
in both direction is applied. Values overriden by user are not affected by this option.

• Default pixel value: Default value to write when outside of input image.

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).

• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Interpolation This group of parameters allows to define how the input image will be interpolated
during resampling. Available choices are:

• Bicubic interpolation
5.4. Geometry 161

– Radius for bicubic interpolation: This parameter allows to control the size of the
bicubic interpolation filter. If the target pixel size is higher than the input pixel size,
increasing this parameter will reduce aliasing artefacts.
• Nearest Neighbor interpolation: Nearest neighbor interpolation leads to poor image quality,
but it is very fast.

• Linear interpolation: Linear interpolation leads to average image quality but is quite fast

Speed optimization parameters This group of parameters allows to optimize processing time.

• RPC modeling (points per axis): Enabling RPC modeling allows to speed-up SPOT5 ortho-
rectification. Value is the number of control points per axis for RPC estimation
• Available RAM (Mb): This allows to set the maximum amount of RAM available for pro-
cessing. As the writing task is time consuming, it is better to write large pieces of data, which
can be achieved by increasing this parameter (pay attention to your system capabilities)
• Resampling grid spacing: Resampling is done according to a coordinate mapping deforma-
tion grid, whose pixel size is set by this parameter, and expressed in the coordinate system of
the output image The closer to the output spacing this parameter is, the more precise will be
the ortho-rectified image,but increasing this parameter will reduce processing time.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_OrthoRectification -io .in QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif -io . out
QB_Toulouse_ortho . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the OrthoRectification application

OrthoRectification = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" OrthoRectification ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

OrthoRectification . SetParameterString (" io . in " , " QB_TOULOUSE_MUL_Extract_500_500 . tif ")
162 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

OrthoRectification . SetParameterString (" io . out " , " QB_Toulouse_ortho . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

OrthoRectification . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Supported sensors are Pleiades, SPOT5 (TIF format), Ikonos, Quickbird, Worldview2, GeoEye.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Ortho-rectification chapter from the OTB Software Guide

5.4.9 Pansharpening

Perform P+XS pansharpening

Detailed description

This application performs P+XS pansharpening. Pansharpening is a process of merging high-

resolution panchromatic and lower resolution multispectral imagery to create a single high-
resolution color image. Algorithms available in the applications are: RCS, bayesian fusion and
Local Mean and Variance Matching(LMVM).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.28, page 163
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Pansharpening.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
5.4. Geometry 163

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
inp Input image Input PAN Image
inxs Input image Input XS Image
out Output image Output image
method Choices Algorithm
method rcs Choice RCS
method lmvm Choice LMVM
method bayes Choice Bayesian
method.lmvm.radiusx Int X radius
method.lmvm.radiusy Int Y radius
method.bayes.lambda Float Weight
method.bayes.s Float S coefficient
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.28: Parameters table for Pansharpening.

Input PAN Image Input panchromatic image.

Input XS Image Input XS image.

Output image Output image.

Algorithm Selection of the pan-sharpening method. Available choices are:

• RCS: Simple RCS Pan sharpening operation.

• LMVM: Local Mean and Variance Matching (LMVM) Pan sharpening.
– X radius: Set the x radius of the sliding window.
– Y radius: Set the y radius of the sliding window.
• Bayesian: Bayesian fusion.
– Weight: Set the weighting value.
– S coefficient: Set the S coefficient.
164 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Pansharpening -inp QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif - inxs QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif -out
Pansharpening . tif uint16

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Pansharpening application

Pansharpening = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Pansharpening ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Pansharpening . SetParameterString (" inp " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

Pansharpening . SetParameterString (" inxs " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

Pansharpening . SetParameterString (" out " , " Pansharpening . tif ")

Pansharpening . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 3)

# The following line execute the application

Pansharpening . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.4.10 Refine Sensor Model

Perform least-square fit of a sensor model to a set of tie points

5.4. Geometry 165

Detailed description

This application reads a geom file containing a sensor model and a text file containing a list of ground
control point, and performs a least-square fit of the sensor model adjustable parameters to these tie
points. It produces an updated geom file as output, as well as an optional ground control points
based statistics file and a vector file containing residues. The output geom file can then be used to
ortho-rectify the data more accurately. Plaease note that for a proper use of the application, elevation
must be correctly set (including DEM and geoid file). The map parameters allows to choose a map
projection in which the accuracy will be estimated in meters.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.29, page 165
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is RefineSensorModel.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

ingeom Input File name Input geom file
outgeom Output File name Output geom file
inpoints Input File name Input file containing tie points
outstat Output File name Output file containing output precision
statistics
outvector Output File name Output vector file with residues
map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
map wgs Choice WGS 84
map epsg Choice EPSG Code
map.utm.zone Int Zone number
map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.29: Parameters table for Refine Sensor Model.

166 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Input geom file Geom file containing the sensor model to refine

Output geom file Geom file containing the refined sensor model

Input file containing tie points. Points are stored in following format:
Input file containing tie points
row col lon lat. Line beginning with # are ignored.

Output file containing output precision statistics Output file containing the following info:
ref lon ref lat elevation predicted lon predicted lat x error ref(meters) y error ref(meters)
global error ref(meters) x error(meters) y error(meters) overall error(meters)

Output vector file with residues File containing segments representing residues

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.
– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.
• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.

• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection

• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;

– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to

your projection
5.4. Geometry 167

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_RefineSensorModel - ingeom input . geom - outgeom output . geom - inpoints points . txt -map
epsg -map . epsg . code 32631

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the RefineSensorModel application

RefineSensorModel = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" RefineSensorModel ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

RefineSensorModel . SetParameterString (" ingeom " , " input . geom ")

RefineSensorModel . SetParameterString (" outgeom " , " output . geom ")

RefineSensorModel . SetParameterString (" inpoints " , " points . txt ")

RefineSensorModel . SetParameterString (" map " ," epsg ")

RefineSensorModel . SetParameterInt (" map . epsg . code " , 32631)

# The following line execute the application

RefineSensorModel . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
168 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• OrthoRectification,HomologousPointsExtraction

5.4.11 Image resampling with a rigid transform

Resample an image with a rigid transform

Detailed description

This application performs a parametric transform on the input image. Scaling, translation and rota-
tion with scaling factor are handled. Parameters of the transform is expressed in physical units, thus
particular attention must be paid on pixel size (value, and sign). Moreover transform is expressed
from input space to output space (on the contrary ITK Transforms are expressed form output space
to input space).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.30, page 169
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is RigidTransformResample.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input image
out Output image Output image
transform Group Transform parameters
transform.type Choices Type of transformation
transform.type id Choice id
transform.type translation Choice translation
.../...
5.4. Geometry 169

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
transform.type rotation Choice rotation
transform.type.id.scalex Float X scaling
transform.type.id.scaley Float Y scaling
transform.type.translation.tx Float The X translation (in physical units)
transform.type.translation.ty Float The Y translation (in physical units)
transform.type.translation.scalex Float X scaling
transform.type.translation.scaley Float Y scaling
transform.type.rotation.angle Float Rotation angle
transform.type.rotation.scalex Float X scaling
transform.type.rotation.scaley Float Y scaling
interpolator Choices Interpolation
interpolator nn Choice Nearest Neighbor interpolation
interpolator linear Choice Linear interpolation
interpolator bco Choice Bicubic interpolation
interpolator.bco.radius Int Radius for bicubic interpolation
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.30: Parameters table for Image resampling with a rigid transform.

Input image The input image to translate.

Output image The transformed output image.

Transform parameters This group of parameters allows to set the transformation to apply.

• Type of transformation: Type of transformation. Available transformations are spatial

scaling, translation and rotation with scaling factor
Available choices are:
– id: Spatial scaling
∗ X scaling: Scaling factor between the output X spacing and the input X spacing
∗ Y scaling: Scaling factor between the output Y spacing and the input Y spacing
– translation: translation
∗ The X translation (in physical units): The translation value along X axis (in
physical units).
170 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

∗ The Y translation (in physical units): The translation value along Y axis (in
physical units)
∗ X scaling: Scaling factor between the output X spacing and the input X spacing
∗ Y scaling: Scaling factor between the output Y spacing and the input Y spacing
– rotation: rotation
∗ Rotation angle: The rotation angle in degree (values between -180 and 180)
∗ X scaling: Scale factor between the X spacing of the rotated output image and the
X spacing of the unrotated image
∗ Y scaling: Scale factor between the Y spacing of the rotated output image and the
Y spacing of the unrotated image

Interpolation This group of parameters allows to define how the input image will be interpolated
during resampling. Available choices are:

• Nearest Neighbor interpolation: Nearest neighbor interpolation leads to poor image quality,
but it is very fast.
• Linear interpolation: Linear interpolation leads to average image quality but is quite fast

• Bicubic interpolation
– Radius for bicubic interpolation: This parameter allows to control the size of the
bicubic interpolation filter. If the target pixel size is higher than the input pixel size,
increasing this parameter will reduce aliasing artefacts.

Available RAM (Mb) This allows to set the maximum amount of RAM available for processing. As
the writing task is time consuming, it is better to write large pieces of data, which can be achieved
by increasing this parameter (pay attention to your system capabilities)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_RigidTransformResample -in qb_toulouse_sub . tif -out rigitTransformImage . tif
- transform . type rotation - transform . type . rotation . angle 20
- transform . type . rotation . scalex 2. - transform . type . rotation . scaley 2.
5.4. Geometry 171

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the RigidTransformResample application

RigidTransformResample = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" RigidTransformResample ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_toulouse_sub . tif ")

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterString (" out " , " rigitTransformImage . tif ")

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterString (" transform . type " ," rotation ")

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterFloat (" transform . type . rotation . angle " , 20)

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterFloat (" transform . type . rotation . scalex " , 2.)

RigidTransformResample . SetParameterFloat (" transform . type . rotation . scaley " , 2.)

# The following line execute the application

RigidTransformResample . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Translation

5.4.12 Superimpose sensor

Using available image metadata, project one image onto another one

Detailed description

This application performs the projection of an image into the geometry of another one.
172 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.31, page 172
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Superimpose.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

inr Input image Reference input
inm Input image The image to reproject
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
lms Float Spacing of the deformation field
out Output image Output image
interpolator Choices Interpolation
interpolator bco Choice Bicubic interpolation
interpolator nn Choice Nearest Neighbor interpolation
interpolator linear Choice Linear interpolation
interpolator.bco.radius Int Radius for bicubic interpolation
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.31: Parameters table for Superimpose sensor.

Reference input The input reference image.

The image to reproject The image to reproject into the geometry of the reference input.

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
5.4. Geometry 173

of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-

file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Spacing of the deformation field Generate a coarser deformation field with the given spacing

Output image Output reprojected image.

Interpolation This group of parameters allows to define how the input image will be interpolated
during resampling. Available choices are:

• Bicubic interpolation: Bicubic interpolation leads to very good image quality but is slow.
– Radius for bicubic interpolation: This parameter allows to control the size of the
bicubic interpolation filter. If the target pixel size is higher than the input pixel size,
increasing this parameter will reduce aliasing artefacts.
• Nearest Neighbor interpolation: Nearest neighbor interpolation leads to poor image quality,
but it is very fast.
• Linear interpolation: Linear interpolation leads to average image quality but is quite fast

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_Superimpose -inr QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif -inm QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif -out
SuperimposedXS_to_PAN . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
174 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Superimpose application

Superimpose = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Superimpose ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Superimpose . SetParameterString (" inr " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

Superimpose . SetParameterString (" inm " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")

Superimpose . SetParameterString (" out " , " SuperimposedXS_to_PAN . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

Superimpose . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.5 Image Filtering

5.5.1 Dimensionality reduction

Perform Dimension reduction of the input image.

Detailed description

Performs dimensionality reduction on input image. PCA,NA-PCA,MAF,ICA methods are available.

It is also possible to compute the inverse transform to reconstruct the image. It is also possible to
optionnaly export the transformation matrix to a text file.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.32, page 175
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is DimensionalityReduction.
5.5. Image Filtering 175

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
rescale Group Rescale Output.
rescale.outmin Float Output min value
rescale.outmax Float Output max value
outinv Output image Inverse Output Image
method Choices Algorithm
method pca Choice PCA
method napca Choice NA-PCA
method maf Choice MAF
method ica Choice ICA
method.napca.radiusx Int Set the x radius of the sliding window.
method.napca.radiusy Int Set the y radius of the sliding window.
method.ica.iter Int number of iterations
method.ica.mu Float Give the increment weight of W in [0, 1]
nbcomp Int Number of Components.
normalize Boolean Normalize.
outmatrix Output File name Transformation matrix output (text format)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.32: Parameters table for Dimensionality reduction.

Input Image The input image to apply dimensionality reduction.

Output Image output image. Components are ordered by decreasing eigenvalues.

Rescale Output.

• Output min value: Minimum value of the output image.

• Output max value: Maximum value of the output image.

Inverse Output Image reconstruct output image.

Algorithm Selection of the reduction dimension method. Available choices are:

176 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• PCA: Principal Component Analysis.

• NA-PCA: Noise Adjusted Principal Component Analysis.
– Set the x radius of the sliding window.:
– Set the y radius of the sliding window.:
• MAF: Maximum Autocorrelation Factor.
• ICA: Independant Component Analysis.
– number of iterations :
– Give the increment weight of W in [0, 1]:

Number of Components. Number of relevant components kept. By default all components are
kept.

Normalize. center AND reduce data before Dimensionality reduction.

Transformation matrix output (text format) Filename to store the transformation matrix (csv format)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_DimensionalityReduction -in cupriteSubHsi . tif -out FilterOutput . tif - method pca

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the DimensionalityReduction application

DimensionalityReduction = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" DimensionalityReduction ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

DimensionalityReduction . SetParameterString (" in " , " cupriteSubHsi . tif ")

DimensionalityReduction . SetParameterString (" out " , " FilterOutput . tif ")

5.5. Image Filtering 177

DimensionalityReduction . SetParameterString (" method " ," pca ")

# The following line execute the application

DimensionalityReduction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

This application does not provide the inverse transform and the transformation matrix export for the
MAF.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• ”Kernel maximum autocorrelation factor and minimum noise fraction transformations,” IEEE
Transactions on Image Processing, vol. 20, no. 3, pp. 612-624, (2011)

5.5.2 Mean Shift filtering (can be used as Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmen-
tation, step 1)

Perform mean shift filtering

Detailed description

This application performs mean shift fitlering (multi-threaded).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.33, page 178
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is MeanShiftSmoothing.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
178 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
in Input image Input Image
fout Output image Filtered output
foutpos Output image Spatial image
spatialr Int Spatial radius
ranger Float Range radius
thres Float Mode convergence threshold
maxiter Int Maximum number of iterations
rangeramp Float Range radius coefficient
modesearch Boolean Mode search.
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.33: Parameters table for Mean Shift filtering (can be used as Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift
segmentation, step 1).

• Input Image: The input image.

• Filtered output: The filtered output image.
• Spatial image: The spatial image output. Spatial image output is a displacement map (pixel
position after convergence).
• Spatial radius: Spatial radius of the neighborhood.
• Range radius: Range radius defining the radius (expressed in radiometry unit) in the multi-
spectral space.
• Mode convergence threshold: Algorithm iterative scheme will stop if mean-shift vector is
below this threshold or if iteration number reached maximum number of iterations.
• Maximum number of iterations: Algorithm iterative scheme will stop if convergence hasn’t
been reached after the maximum number of iterations.
• Range radius coefficient: This coefficient makes dependent the ranger of the colorimetry of
the filtered pixel : y = rangeramp*x+ranger.
• Mode search.: If activated pixel iterative convergence is stopped if the path . Be careful,
with this option, the result will slightly depend on thread number
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
5.5. Image Filtering 179

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_MeanShiftSmoothing -in maur_rgb . png - fout MeanShift_FilterOutput . tif - spatialr 16
- ranger 16 - thres 0.1 - maxiter 100

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the MeanShiftSmoothing application

MeanShiftSmoothing = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" MeanShiftSmoothing ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterString (" in " , " maur_rgb . png ")

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterString (" fout " , " MeanShift_FilterOutput . tif ")

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterInt (" spatialr " , 16)

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterFloat (" ranger " , 16)

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterFloat (" thres " , 0.1)

MeanShiftSmoothing . SetParameterInt (" maxiter " , 100)

# The following line execute the application

MeanShiftSmoothing . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

With mode search option, the result will slightly depend on thread number.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.5.3 Smoothing

Apply a smoothing filter to an image

Detailed description

This application applies smoothing filter to an image. Either gaussian, mean, or anisotropic diffusion
are available.
180 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.34, page 180
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is Smoothing.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
type Choices Smoothing Type
type mean Choice Mean
type gaussian Choice Gaussian
type anidif Choice Anisotropic Diffusion
type.mean.radius Int Radius
type.gaussian.radius Float Radius
type.anidif.timestep Float Time Step
type.anidif.nbiter Int Nb Iterations
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.34: Parameters table for Smoothing.

Input Image Input image to smooth.

Output Image Output smoothed image.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Smoothing Type Smoothing kernel to apply Available choices are:

• Mean
– Radius: Mean radius (in pixels)

• Gaussian
– Radius: Gaussian radius (in pixels)
5.5. Image Filtering 181

• Anisotropic Diffusion
– Time Step: Diffusion equation time step
– Nb Iterations: Number of iterations

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Examples

Example 1 Image smoothing using a mean filter.To run this example in command-line, use the
following:
otbcli_Smoothing -in Romania_Extract . tif -out smoothedImage_mean . png uchar - type mean

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Smoothing application

Smoothing = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Smoothing ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" in " , " Romania_Extract . tif ")

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" out " , " smoothedImage_mean . png ")

Smoothing . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 1)

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" type " ," mean ")

# The following line execute the application

Smoothing . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Example 2 Image smoothing using an anisotropic diffusion filter.To run this example in command-
line, use the following:
otbcli_Smoothing -in Romania_Extract . tif -out smoothedImage_ani . png float - type anidif
- type . anidif . timestep 0.1 - type . anidif . nbiter 5

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication
182 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

# The following line creates an instance of the Smoothing application

Smoothing = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Smoothing ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" in " , " Romania_Extract . tif ")

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" out " , " smoothedImage_ani . png ")

Smoothing . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 6)

Smoothing . SetParameterString (" type " ," anidif ")

Smoothing . SetParameterFloat (" type . anidif . timestep " , 0.1)

Smoothing . SetParameterInt (" type . anidif . nbiter " , 5)

# The following line execute the application

Smoothing . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.6 Feature Extraction

5.6.1 Binary Morphological Operation

Performs morphological operations on an input image channel

Detailed description

This application performs binary morphological operations on a mono band image

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.35, page 183
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is BinaryMorphologicalOperation.
5.6. Feature Extraction 183

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Feature Output Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
structype Choices Structuring Element Type
structype ball Choice Ball
structype cross Choice Cross
structype.ball.xradius Int The Structuring Element X Radius
structype.ball.yradius Int The Structuring Element Y Radius
filter Choices Morphological Operation
filter dilate Choice Dilate
filter erode Choice Erode
filter opening Choice Opening
filter closing Choice Closing
filter.dilate.foreval Float Foreground Value
filter.dilate.backval Float Background Value
filter.erode.foreval Float Foreground Value
filter.erode.backval Float Background Value
filter.opening.foreval Float Foreground Value
filter.opening.backval Float Background Value
filter.closing.foreval Float Foreground Value
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.35: Parameters table for Binary Morphological Operation.

Input Image The input image to be filtered.

Feature Output Image Output image containing the filtered output image.

Selected Channel The selected channel index

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Structuring Element Type Choice of the structuring element type Available choices are:

• Ball
184 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

– The Structuring Element X Radius: The Structuring Element X Radius

– The Structuring Element Y Radius: The Structuring Element Y Radius
• Cross

Morphological Operation Choice of the morphological operation Available choices are:

• Dilate

– Foreground Value: The Foreground Value

– Background Value: The Background Value
• Erode

– Foreground Value: The Foreground Value

– Background Value: The Background Value
• Opening
– Foreground Value: The Foreground Value
– Background Value: The Background Value
• Closing
– Foreground Value: The Foreground Value

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_BinaryMorphologicalOperation -in qb_RoadExtract . tif -out opened . tif - channel 1
- structype . ball . xradius 5 - structype . ball . yradius 5 - filter erode

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the BinaryMorphologicalOperation application

5.6. Feature Extraction 185

BinaryMorphologicalOperation =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" BinaryMorphologicalOperation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" out " , " opened . tif ")

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 1)

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" structype . ball . xradius " , 5)

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" structype . ball . yradius " , 5)

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" filter " ," erode ")

# The following line execute the application

BinaryMorphologicalOperation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• itkBinaryDilateImageFilter, itkBinaryErodeImageFilter, itkBinaryMorphologicalOpeningIm-

ageFilter and itkBinaryMorphologicalClosingImageFilter classes

5.6.2 Compute Polyline Feature From Image

This application compute for each studied polyline, contained in the input VectorData, the choosen
descriptors.

Detailed description

The first step in the classifier fusion based validation is to compute, for each studied polyline, the
choosen descriptors.
186 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.36, page 186
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
vd Input vector data Vector Data
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
expr String Feature expression
field String Feature name
out Output vector data Output Vector Data
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.36: Parameters table for Compute Polyline Feature From Image.

Input Image An image to compute the descriptors on.

Vector Data Vector data containing the polylines where the features will be computed.

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
5.6. Feature Extraction 187

and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Feature expression The feature formula (b1 <0.3) where b1 is the standard name of input image
first band

Feature name The field name corresponding to the feature codename (NONDVI, ROADSA...)

Output Vector Data The output vector data containing polylines with a new field

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage -in NDVI . TIF -vd roads_ground_truth . shp - expr "( b1 >
0.4) " - field NONDVI -out PolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NONDVI_gt . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage application

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . SetParameterString (" in " , " NDVI . TIF ")

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . SetParameterString (" vd " , " roads_ground_truth . shp ")

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . SetParameterString (" expr " , "( b1 > 0.4) ")

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . SetParameterString (" field " , " NONDVI ")

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . SetParameterString (" out " ,

" PolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NONDVI_gt . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

ComputePolylineFeatureFromImage . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
188 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Limitations

Since it does not rely on streaming process, take care of the size of input image before launching
application.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.6.3 Fuzzy Model estimation

Estimate feature fuzzy model parameters using 2 vector data (ground truth samples and wrong sam-
ples).

Detailed description

Estimate feature fuzzy model parameters using 2 vector data (ground truth samples and wrong sam-
ples).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.37, page 189
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is DSFuzzyModelEstimation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

psin Input vector data Input Positive Vector Data
nsin Input vector data Input Negative Vector Data
belsup String list Belief Support
plasup String list Plausibility Support
cri String Criterion
wgt Float Weighting
initmod Input File name initialization model
desclist String list Descriptor list
maxnbit Int Maximum number of iterations
optobs Boolean Optimizer Observer
out Output File name Output filename
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
5.6. Feature Extraction 189

Figure 5.37: Parameters table for Fuzzy Model estimation.

• Input Positive Vector Data: Ground truth vector data for positive samples
• Input Negative Vector Data: Ground truth vector data for negative samples
• Belief Support: Dempster Shafer study hypothesis to compute belief
• Plausibility Support: Dempster Shafer study hypothesis to compute plausibility

• Criterion: Dempster Shafer criterion (by default (belief+plausibility)/2)

• Weighting: Coefficient between 0 and 1 to promote undetection or false detections (default
0.5)
• initialization model: Initialization model (xml file) to be used. If the xml initialization
model is set, the descriptor list is not used (specified using the option -desclist)
• Descriptor list: List of the descriptors to be used in the model (must be specified to perform
an automatic initialization)
• Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of optimizer iteration (default 200)

• Optimizer Observer: Activate the optimizer observer

• Output filename: Output model file name (xml file) contains the optimal model to perform
informations fusion.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file

• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_DSFuzzyModelEstimation - psin cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp
- nsin cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_wr . shp - belsup " ROADSA " - plasup
" NONDVI " " ROADSA " " NOBUIL " - initmod Dempster - Shafer / DSFuzzyModel_Init . xml - maxnbit 4
- optobs true -out DSFuzzyModelEstimation . xml

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
190 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the DSFuzzyModelEstimation application

DSFuzzyModelEstimation = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" DSFuzzyModelEstimation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterString (" psin " ,
" cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp ")

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterString (" nsin " ,

" cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_wr . shp ")

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterStringList (" belsup " , [ ’" ROADSA " ’])

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterStringList (" plasup " , [ ’" NONDVI " ’, ’" ROADSA " ’, ’" NOBUIL " ’])

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterString (" initmod " , " Dempster - Shafer / DSFuzzyModel_Init . xml ")

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterInt (" maxnbit " , 4)

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterString (" optobs " ,"1")

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . SetParameterString (" out " , " DSFuzzyModelEstimation . xml ")

# The following line execute the application

DSFuzzyModelEstimation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.6.4 Edge Feature Extraction

Computes edge features on every pixel of the input image selected channel

Detailed description

This application computes edge features on a mono band image

5.6. Feature Extraction 191

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.38, page 191
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is EdgeExtraction.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
filter Choices Edge feature
filter gradient Choice Gradient
filter sobel Choice Sobel
filter touzi Choice Touzi
filter.touzi.xradius Int The X Radius
filter.touzi.yradius Int The Y Radius
out Output image Feature Output Image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.38: Parameters table for Edge Feature Extraction.

Input Image The input image to compute the features on.

Selected Channel The selected channel index

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Edge feature Choice of edge feature Available choices are:

• Gradient

• Sobel
• Touzi
– The X Radius:
– The Y Radius:
192 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Feature Output Image Output image containing the edge features.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_EdgeExtraction -in qb_RoadExtract . tif - channel 1 -out Edges . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the EdgeExtraction application

EdgeExtraction = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" EdgeExtraction ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

EdgeExtraction . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

EdgeExtraction . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 1)

EdgeExtraction . SetParameterString (" out " , " Edges . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

EdgeExtraction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otb class
5.6. Feature Extraction 193

5.6.5 Grayscale Morphological Operation

Performs morphological operations on a grayscale input image

Detailed description

This application performs grayscale morphological operations on a mono band image

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.39, page 193
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Feature Output Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
structype Choices Structuring Element Type
structype ball Choice Ball
structype cross Choice Cross
structype.ball.xradius Int The Structuring Element X Radius
structype.ball.yradius Int The Structuring Element Y Radius
filter Choices Morphological Operation
filter dilate Choice Dilate
filter erode Choice Erode
filter opening Choice Opening
filter closing Choice Closing
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.39: Parameters table for Grayscale Morphological Operation.

Input Image The input image to be filtered.

Feature Output Image Output image containing the filtered output image.
194 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Selected Channel The selected channel index

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Structuring Element Type Choice of the structuring element type Available choices are:

• Ball
– The Structuring Element X Radius: The Structuring Element X Radius
– The Structuring Element Y Radius: The Structuring Element Y Radius
• Cross

Morphological Operation Choice of the morphological operation Available choices are:

• Dilate
• Erode
• Opening
• Closing

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation -in qb_RoadExtract . tif -out opened . tif - channel 1
- structype . ball . xradius 5 - structype . ball . yradius 5 - filter erode

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation application

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation ")
5.6. Feature Extraction 195

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" out " , " opened . tif ")

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 1)

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" structype . ball . xradius " , 5)

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterInt (" structype . ball . yradius " , 5)

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . SetParameterString (" filter " ," erode ")

# The following line execute the application

GrayScaleMorphologicalOperation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• itkGrayscaleDilateImageFilter, itkGrayscaleErodeImageFilter, itkGrayscaleMorpholog-

icalOpeningImageFilter and itkGrayscaleMorphologicalClosingImageFilter classes

5.6.6 Haralick Texture Extraction

Computes textures on every pixel of the input image selected channel

Detailed description

This application computes Haralick, advanced and higher order textures on a mono band image

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.40, page 196
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is HaralickTextureExtraction.
196 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
parameters Group Texture feature parameters
parameters.xrad Int X Radius
parameters.yrad Int Y Radius
parameters.xoff Int X Offset
parameters.yoff Int Y Offset
parameters.min Float Image Minimum
parameters.max Float Image Maximum
parameters.nbbin Int Histogram number of bin
texture Choices Texture Set Selection
texture simple Choice Simple Haralick Texture Features
texture advanced Choice Advanced Texture Features
texture higher Choice Higher Order Texture Features
out Output image Output Image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.40: Parameters table for Haralick Texture Extraction.

Input Image The input image to compute the features on.

Selected Channel The selected channel index

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Texture feature parameters This group of parameters allows to define texture parameters.

• X Radius: X Radius

• Y Radius: Y Radius
• X Offset: X Offset
• Y Offset: Y Offset

• Image Minimum: Image Minimum

5.6. Feature Extraction 197

• Image Maximum: Image Maximum

• Histogram number of bin: Histogram number of bin

Texture Set Selection Choice of The Texture Set Available choices are:

• Simple Haralick Texture Features: This group of parameters defines the 8 local Haralick
texture feature output image. The image channels are: Energy, Entropy, Correlation, Inverse
Difference Moment, Inertia, Cluster Shade, Cluster Prominence and Haralick Correlation
• Advanced Texture Features: This group of parameters defines the 9 advanced texture feature
output image. The image channels are: Mean, Variance, Sum Average, Sum Variance, Sum
Entropy, Difference of Entropies, Difference of Variances, IC1 and IC2
• Higher Order Texture Features: This group of parameters defines the 11 higher order tex-
ture feature output image. The image channels are: Short Run Emphasis, Long Run Empha-
sis, Grey-Level Nonuniformity, Run Length Nonuniformity, Run Percentage, Low Grey-Level
Run Emphasis, High Grey-Level Run Emphasis, Short Run Low Grey-Level Emphasis, Short
Run High Grey-Level Emphasis, Long Run Low Grey-Level Emphasis and Long Run High
Grey-Level Emphasis

Output Image Output image containing the selected texture features.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_HaralickTextureExtraction -in qb_RoadExtract . tif - channel 2 - parameters . xrad 3
- parameters . yrad 3 - texture simple -out HaralickTextures . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the HaralickTextureExtraction application

HaralickTextureExtraction =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" HaralickTextureExtraction ")
198 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 2)

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterInt (" parameters . xrad " , 3)

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterInt (" parameters . yrad " , 3)

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterString (" texture " ," simple ")

HaralickTextureExtraction . SetParameterString (" out " , " HaralickTextures . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

HaralickTextureExtraction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbScalarImageToTexturesFilter, otbScalarImageToAdvancedTexturesFilter and otb-

ScalarImageToHigherOrderTexturesFilter classes

5.6.7 Homologous Points Extraction

Allows to compute homologous points between images using keypoints

Detailed description

This application allows to compute homologous points between images using keypoints. SIFT or
SURF keypoints can be used and the band on which keypoints are computed can be set indepen-
dantly for both images. The application offers two modes : the first is the full mode where keypoints
are extracted from the full extent of both images (please note that in this mode large image file are
not supported). The second mode, called geobins, allows to set-up spatial binning to get fewer points
spread accross the entire image. In this mode, the corresponding spatial bin in the second image is
estimated using geographical transform or sensor modelling, and is padded according to the user
5.6. Feature Extraction 199

defined precision. Last, in both modes the application can filter matches whose colocalisation in
first image exceed this precision. The elevation parameters are to deal more precisely with sensor
modelling in case of sensor geometry data. The outvector option allows to create a vector file with
segments corresponding to the localisation error between the matches. It can be useful to assess the
precision of a registration for instance. The vector file is always reprojected to EPSG:4326 to allow
display in a GIS. This is done via reprojection or by applying the image sensor models.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.41, page 200
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is HomologousPointsExtraction.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in1 Input image Input Image 1
band1 Int Input band 1
in2 Input image Input Image 2
band2 Int Input band 2
algorithm Choices Keypoints detection algorithm
algorithm surf Choice SURF algorithm
algorithm sift Choice SIFT algorithm
threshold Float Distance threshold for matching
backmatching Boolean Use back-matching to filter matches.
mode Choices Keypoints search mode
mode full Choice Extract and match all keypoints (no stream-
ing)
mode geobins Choice Search keypoints in small spatial bins regu-
larly spread accross first image
mode.geobins.binsize Int Size of bin
mode.geobins.binsizey Int Size of bin (y direction)
mode.geobins.binstep Int Steps between bins
mode.geobins.binstepy Int Steps between bins (y direction)
mode.geobins.margin Int Margin from image border to start/end bins
(in pixels)
precision Float Estimated precision of the colocalisation
function (in pixels).
mfilter Boolean Filter points according to geographical or
sensor based colocalisation
2wgs84 Boolean If enabled, points from second image will be
exported in WGS84
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
.../...
200 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
out Output File name Output file with tie points
outvector Output File name Output vector file with tie points
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.41: Parameters table for Homologous Points Extraction.

Input Image 1 First input image

Input band 1 Index of the band from input image 1 to use for keypoints extraction

Input Image 2 Second input image

Input band 2 Index of the band from input image 1 to use for keypoints extraction

Keypoints detection algorithm Choice of the detection algorithm to use Available choices are:

• SURF algorithm
• SIFT algorithm

Distance threshold for matching The distance threshold for matching.

Use back-matching to filter matches. If set to true, matches should be consistent in both ways.

Keypoints search mode Available choices are:

• Extract and match all keypoints (no streaming): Extract and match all keypoints, loading
both images entirely into memory
• Search keypoints in small spatial bins regularly spread accross first image: This method
allows to retrieve a set of tie points regulary spread accross image 1. Corresponding bins in
image 2 are retrieved using sensor and geographical information if available. The first bin
position takes into account the margin parameter. Bins are cropped to the largest image region
shrinked by the margin parameter for both in1 and in2 images.
5.6. Feature Extraction 201

– Size of bin: Radius of the spatial bin in pixels

– Size of bin (y direction): Radius of the spatial bin in pixels (y direction). If not set, the
mode.geobins.binsize value is used.
– Steps between bins: Steps between bins in pixels
– Steps between bins (y direction): Steps between bins in pixels (y direction). If not set,
the mode.geobins.binstep value is used.
– Margin from image border to start/end bins (in pixels): Margin from image border
to start/end bins (in pixels)

Estimated precision of the colocalisation function (in pixels). Estimated precision of the colocalisa-
tion function in pixels

Filter points according to geographical or sensor based colocalisation If enabled, this option allows
to filter matches according to colocalisation from sensor or geographical information, using the given
tolerancy expressed in pixels

If enabled, points from second image will be exported in WGS84

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).

• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Output file with tie points File containing the list of tie points

Output vector file with tie points File containing segments representing matches
202 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_HomologousPointsExtraction -in1 sensor_stereo_left . tif -in2 sensor_stereo_right . tif
- mode full -out homologous . txt

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the HomologousPointsExtraction application

HomologousPointsExtraction =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" HomologousPointsExtraction ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

HomologousPointsExtraction . SetParameterString (" in1 " , " sensor_stereo_left . tif ")

HomologousPointsExtraction . SetParameterString (" in2 " , " sensor_stereo_right . tif ")

HomologousPointsExtraction . SetParameterString (" mode " ," full ")

HomologousPointsExtraction . SetParameterString (" out " , " homologous . txt ")

# The following line execute the application

HomologousPointsExtraction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Full mode does not handle large images.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• RefineSensorModel
5.6. Feature Extraction 203

5.6.8 Line segment detection

Detect line segments in raster

Detailed description

This application detects locally straight contours in a image. It is based on Burns, Hanson, and
Riseman method and use an a contrario validation approach (Desolneux, Moisan, and Morel). The
algorithm was published by Rafael Gromponevon Gioi, Jà r c à mie
c Jakubowicz, Jean-Michel
Morel and Gregory Randall.
The given approach computes gradient and level lines of the image and detects aligned points in line
support region. The application allows to export the detected lines in a vector data.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.42, page 203
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is LineSegmentDetection.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output vector data Output Detected lines
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
norescale Boolean No rescaling in [0, 255]
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.42: Parameters table for Line segment detection.

Input Image Input image on which lines will be detected.

Output Detected lines Output detected line segments (vector data).

204 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

No rescaling in [0, 255] By default, the input image amplitude is rescaled between [0,255]. Turn
on this parameter to skip rescaling

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_LineSegmentDetection -in QB_Suburb . png -out LineSegmentDetection . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the LineSegmentDetection application

LineSegmentDetection = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" LineSegmentDetection ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

LineSegmentDetection . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Suburb . png ")

LineSegmentDetection . SetParameterString (" out " , " LineSegmentDetection . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

LineSegmentDetection . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
5.6. Feature Extraction 205

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• On Line demonstration of the LSD algorithm is available here:

http://www.ipol.im/pub/algo/gjmr line segment detector/

5.6.9 Local Statistic Extraction

Computes local statistical moments on every pixel in the selected channel of the input image

Detailed description

This application computes the 4 local statistical moments on every pixel in the selected channel of
the input image, over a specified neighborhood. The output image is multi band with one statistical
moment (feature) per band. Thus, the 4 output features are the Mean, the Variance, the Skewness
and the Kurtosis. They are provided in this exact order in the output image.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.43, page 206
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is LocalStatisticExtraction.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
radius Int Neighborhood radius
out Output image Feature Output Image
.../...
206 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.43: Parameters table for Local Statistic Extraction.

• Input Image: The input image to compute the features on.

• Selected Channel: The selected channel index
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Neighborhood radius: The computational window radius.
• Feature Output Image: Output image containing the local statistical moments.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_LocalStatisticExtraction -in qb_RoadExtract . tif - channel 1 - radius 3 -out
Statistics . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the LocalStatisticExtraction application

LocalStatisticExtraction =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" LocalStatisticExtraction ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

LocalStatisticExtraction . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

LocalStatisticExtraction . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 1)

LocalStatisticExtraction . SetParameterInt (" radius " , 3)

LocalStatisticExtraction . SetParameterString (" out " , " Statistics . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

LocalStatisticExtraction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
5.6. Feature Extraction 207

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbRadiometricMomentsImageFunction class

5.6.10 Multivariate alteration detector

Multivariate Alteration Detector

Detailed description

This application detects change between two given images.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.44, page 208
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is MultivariateAlterationDetector.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in1 Input image Input Image 1
in2 Input image Input Image 2
out Output image Change Map
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
208 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Figure 5.44: Parameters table for Multivariate alteration detector.

• Input Image 1: Image which describe initial state of the scene.

• Input Image 2: Image which describe scene after perturbations.
• Change Map: Image of detected changes.

• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_MultivariateAlterationDetector -in1 Spot5 - Gloucester - before . tif -in2
Spot5 - Gloucester - after . tif -out detectedChangeImage . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the MultivariateAlterationDetector application

MultivariateAlterationDetector =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" MultivariateAlterationDetector ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

MultivariateAlterationDetector . SetParameterString (" in1 " , " Spot5 - Gloucester - before . tif ")

MultivariateAlterationDetector . SetParameterString (" in2 " , " Spot5 - Gloucester - after . tif ")

MultivariateAlterationDetector . SetParameterString (" out " , " detectedChangeImage . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

MultivariateAlterationDetector . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.6. Feature Extraction 209

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• This filter implements the Multivariate Alteration Detector, based on the following work:
A. A. Nielsen and K. Conradsen, Multivariate alteration detection (mad) in multispectral,
bi-temporal image data: a new approach to change detection studies, Remote Sens. Environ.,
vol. 64, pp. 1-19, (1998)

Multivariate Alteration Detector takes two images as inputs and produce a set of N
change maps as a VectorImage (where N is the maximum of number of bands in first and
second image) with the following properties:
- Change maps are differences of a pair of linear combinations of bands from image 1 and
bands from image 2 chosen to maximize the correlation.
- Each change map is orthogonal to the others.

This is a statistical method which can handle different modalities and even different
bands and number of bands between images.

If numbers of bands in image 1 and 2 are equal, then change maps are sorted by in-
creasing correlation. If number of bands is different, the change maps are sorted by
decreasing correlation.

The GetV1() and GetV2() methods allow to retrieve the linear combinations used to
generate the Mad change maps as a vnl matrix of double, and the GetRho() method allows
to retrieve the correlation associated to each Mad change maps as a vnl vector.

This filter has been implemented from the Matlab code kindly made available by the
authors here:
http://www2.imm.dtu.dk/ aa/software.html

Both cases (same and different number of bands) have been validated by comparing
the output image to the output produced by the Matlab code, and the reference images for
testing have been generated from the Matlab code using Octave.

5.6.11 Radiometric Indices

Compute radiometric indices.

210 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application computes radiometric indices using the relevant channels of the input image. The
output is a multi band image into which each channel is one of the selected indices.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.45, page 210
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is RadiometricIndices.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
channels Group Channels selection
channels.blue Int Blue Channel
channels.green Int Green Channel
channels.red Int Red Channel
channels.nir Int NIR Channel
channels.mir Int Mir Channel
list List Available Radiometric Indices
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.45: Parameters table for Radiometric Indices.

Input Image Input image

Output Image Radiometric indices output image

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Channels selection Channels selection

• Blue Channel: Blue channel index

5.6. Feature Extraction 211

• Green Channel: Green channel index

• Red Channel: Red channel index
• NIR Channel: NIR channel index
• Mir Channel: Mir channel index

Available Radiometric Indices List of available radiometric indices with their relevant channels in
brackets:
Vegetation:NDVI - Normalized difference vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:TNDVI - Transformed normalized difference vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:RVI - Ratio vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:SAVI - Soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:TSAVI - Transformed soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:MSAVI - Modified soil adjusted vegetation index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:MSAVI2 - Modified soil adjusted vegetation index 2 (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:GEMI - Global environment monitoring index (Red, NIR)
Vegetation:IPVI - Infrared percentage vegetation index (Red, NIR)

Water:NDWI - Normalized difference water index (Gao 1996) (NIR, MIR)

Water:NDWI2 - Normalized difference water index (Mc Feeters 1996) (Green, NIR)
Water:MNDWI - Modified normalized difference water index (Xu 2006) (Green, MIR)
Water:NDPI - Normalized difference pond index (Lacaux et al.) (MIR, Green)
Water:NDTI - Normalized difference turbidity index (Lacaux et al.) (Red, Green)

Soil:RI - Redness index (Red, Green)

Soil:CI - Color index (Red, Green)
Soil:BI - Brightness index (Red, Green)
Soil:BI2 - Brightness index 2 (NIR, Red, Green)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_RadiometricIndices -in qb_RoadExtract . tif - list Vegetation : NDVI Vegetation : RVI
Vegetation : IPVI -out RadiometricIndicesImage . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
212 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the RadiometricIndices application

RadiometricIndices = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" RadiometricIndices ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

RadiometricIndices . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

RadiometricIndices . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbVegetationIndicesFunctor, otbWaterIndicesFunctor and otbSoilIndicesFunctor classes

5.6.12 SFS Texture Extraction

Computes Structural Feature Set textures on every pixel of the input image selected channel

Detailed description

This application computes SFS textures on a mono band image

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.46, page 213
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is SFSTextureExtraction.
5.6. Feature Extraction 213

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
channel Int Selected Channel
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
parameters Group Texture feature parameters
parameters.spethre Float Spectral Threshold
parameters.spathre Int Spatial Threshold
parameters.nbdir Int Number of Direction
parameters.alpha Float Alpha
parameters.maxcons Int Ratio Maximum Consideration Number
out Output image Feature Output Image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.46: Parameters table for SFS Texture Extraction.

Input Image The input image to compute the features on.

Selected Channel The selected channel index

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Texture feature parameters This group of parameters allows to define SFS texture parameters.
The available texture features are SFS’Length, SFS’Width, SFS’PSI, SFS’W-Mean, SFS’Ratio and
SFS’SD. They are provided in this exact order in the output image.

• Spectral Threshold: Spectral Threshold

• Spatial Threshold: Spatial Threshold

• Number of Direction: Number of Direction
• Alpha: Alpha
• Ratio Maximum Consideration Number: Ratio Maximum Consideration Number

Feature Output Image Output image containing the SFS texture features.
214 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_SFSTextureExtraction -in qb_RoadExtract . tif - channel 1 - parameters . spethre 50.0
- parameters . spathre 100 -out SFSTextures . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the SFSTextureExtraction application

SFSTextureExtraction = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" SFSTextureExtraction ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

SFSTextureExtraction . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

SFSTextureExtraction . SetParameterInt (" channel " , 1)

SFSTextureExtraction . SetParameterFloat (" parameters . spethre " , 50.0)

SFSTextureExtraction . SetParameterInt (" parameters . spathre " , 100)

SFSTextureExtraction . SetParameterString (" out " , " SFSTextures . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

SFSTextureExtraction . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbSFSTexturesImageFilter class
5.6. Feature Extraction 215

5.6.13 Vector Data validation

Vector data validation based on the fusion of features using Dempster-Shafer evidence theory frame-
work.

Detailed description

This application validates or unvalidate the studied samples using the Dempster-Shafer theory.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.47, page 215
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VectorDataDSValidation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input vector data Input Vector Data
descmod Input File name Descriptors model filename
belsup String list Belief Support
plasup String list Plausibility Support
cri String Criterion
thd Float Criterion threshold
out Output vector data Output Vector Data
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.47: Parameters table for Vector Data validation.

• Input Vector Data: Input vector data to validate

• Descriptors model filename: Fuzzy descriptors model (xml file)

• Belief Support: Dempster Shafer study hypothesis to compute belief

• Plausibility Support: Dempster Shafer study hypothesis to compute plausibility
• Criterion: Dempster Shafer criterion (by default (belief+plausibility)/2)

• Criterion threshold: Criterion threshold (default 0.5)

216 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Output Vector Data: Output VectorData containing only the validated samples
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VectorDataDSValidation -in cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp
- belsup cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp - descmod DSFuzzyModel . xml
-out VectorDataDSValidation . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VectorDataDSValidation application

VectorDataDSValidation = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VectorDataDSValidation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VectorDataDSValidation . SetParameterString (" in " ,
" cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp ")

VectorDataDSValidation . SetParameterStringList (" belsup " ,

[ ’ cdbTvComputePolylineFeatureFromImage_LI_NOBUIL_gt . shp ’])

VectorDataDSValidation . SetParameterString (" descmod " , " DSFuzzyModel . xml ")

VectorDataDSValidation . SetParameterString (" out " , " VectorDataDSValidation . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

VectorDataDSValidation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

5.7. Stereo 217

• http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dempster-Shafer theory

5.7 Stereo

5.7.1 Pixel-wise Block-Matching

Performs block-matching to estimate pixel-wise disparities between two images

Detailed description

This application allows to performs block-matching to estimate pixel-wise disparities between two
images. The application allows to choose the block-matching method to use. It also allows to
input masks (related to the left and right input image) of pixels for which the disparity should be
investigated. Additionally, two criteria can be optionally used to disable disparity investigation
for some pixel: a no-data value, and a threshold on the local variance. This allows to speed-up
computation by avoiding to investigate disparities that will not be reliable anyway. For efficiency
reasons, if the optimal metric values image is desired, it will be concatenated to the output image
(which will then have three bands : horizontal disparity, vertical disparity and metric value). One
can split these images afterward.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.48, page 218
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is BlockMatching.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.inleft Input image Left input image
io.inright Input image Right input image
io.out Output image The output disparity map
io.outmask Output image The output mask corresponding to all crite-
rions
io.outmetric Boolean Output optimal metric values as well
mask Group Image masking parameters
mask.inleft Input image Discard left pixels from mask image
mask.inright Input image Discard right pixels from mask image
mask.nodata Float Discard pixels with no-data value
mask.variancet Float Discard pixels with low local variance
bm Group Block matching parameters
.../...
218 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
bm.metric Choices Block-matching metric
bm.metric ssd Choice Sum of Squared Distances
bm.metric ncc Choice Normalized Cross-Correlation
bm.metric lp Choice Lp pseudo-norm
bm.metric.lp.p Float p value
bm.radius Int Radius of blocks
bm.minhd Int Minimum horizontal disparity
bm.maxhd Int Maximum horizontal disparity
bm.minvd Int Minimum vertical disparity
bm.maxvd Int Maximum vertical disparity
bm.subpixel Choices Sub-pixel interpolation
bm.subpixel none Choice None
bm.subpixel parabolic Choice Parabolic
bm.subpixel triangular Choice Triangular
bm.subpixel dichotomy Choice Dichotomy
bm.step Int Computation step
bm.startx Int X start index
bm.starty Int Y start index
bm.medianfilter Group Median filtering
bm.medianfilter.radius Int Radius
bm.medianfilter.incoherence Float Incoherence threshold
bm.initdisp Choices Initial disparities
bm.initdisp none Choice None
bm.initdisp uniform Choice Uniform initial disparity
bm.initdisp maps Choice Initial disparity maps
bm.initdisp.uniform.hdisp Int Horizontal initial disparity
bm.initdisp.uniform.vdisp Int Vertical initial disparity
bm.initdisp.uniform.hrad Int Horizontal exploration radius
bm.initdisp.uniform.vrad Int Vertical exploration radius
bm.initdisp.maps.hmap Input image Horizontal initial disparity map
bm.initdisp.maps.vmap Input image Vertical initial disparity map
bm.initdisp.maps.hrad Int Horizontal exploration radius
bm.initdisp.maps.vrad Int Vertical exploration radius
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.48: Parameters table for Pixel-wise Block-Matching.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set the input and output images.
5.7. Stereo 219

• Left input image: The left input image (reference)

• Right input image: The right input (secondary)
• The output disparity map: An image containing the estimated disparities as well as the
metric values if the option is used

• The output mask corresponding to all criterions: A mask image corresponding to all
citerions (see masking parameters). Only required if variance threshold or nodata criterions
are set.
• Output optimal metric values as well: If used, the output image will have a second com-
ponent with metric optimal values

Image masking parameters This group of parameters allows to determine the masking parameters
to prevent disparities estimation for some pixels of the left image

• Discard left pixels from mask image: This parameter allows to provide a custom mask for
the left image.Block matching will be only perform on pixels inside the mask.
• Discard right pixels from mask image: This parameter allows to provide a custom mask
for the right image.Block matching will be perform only on pixels inside the mask.
• Discard pixels with no-data value: This parameter allows to discard pixels whose value is
equal to the user-defined no-data value.
• Discard pixels with low local variance: This parameter allows to discard pixels whose local
variance is too small (the size of the neighborhood is given by the radius parameter)

Block matching parameters This group of parameters allow to tune the block-matching behaviour

• Block-matching metric:
Available choices are:
– Sum of Squared Distances: Sum of squared distances between pixels value in the met-
ric window
– Normalized Cross-Correlation: Normalized Cross-Correlation between the left and
right windows
– Lp pseudo-norm: Lp pseudo-norm between the left and right windows
∗ p value: Value of the p parameter in Lp pseudo-norm (must be positive)

• Radius of blocks: The radius (in pixels) of blocks in Block-Matching

• Minimum horizontal disparity: Minimum horizontal disparity to explore (can be negative)
220 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Maximum horizontal disparity: Maximum horizontal disparity to explore (can be negative)

• Minimum vertical disparity: Minimum vertical disparity to explore (can be negative)
• Maximum vertical disparity: Maximum vertical disparity to explore (can be negative)
• Sub-pixel interpolation: Estimate disparities with sub-pixel precision
Available choices are:
– None: No sub-pixel
– Parabolic: Parabolic fit
– Triangular: Triangular fit
– Dichotomy: Dichotomic search
• Computation step: Location step between computed disparities
• X start index: X start index of the subsampled grid (wrt the input image grid)
• Y start index: Y start index of the subsampled grid (wrt the input image grid)
• Median filtering: Use a median filter to get a smooth disparity map
– Radius: Radius for median filter
– Incoherence threshold: Incoherence threshold between original and filtered disparity
• Initial disparities:
Available choices are:
– None: No initial disparity used
– Uniform initial disparity: Use an uniform initial disparity estimate
∗ Horizontal initial disparity: Value of the uniform horizontal disparity initial esti-
mate (in pixels)
∗ Vertical initial disparity: Value of the uniform vertical disparity initial estimate
(in pixels)
∗ Horizontal exploration radius: Horizontal exploration radius around the initial
disparity estimate (in pixels)
∗ Vertical exploration radius: Vertical exploration radius around the initial dispar-
ity estimate (in pixels)
– Initial disparity maps: Use initial disparity maps
∗ Horizontal initial disparity map: Map of the initial horizontal disparities
∗ Vertical initial disparity map: Map of the initial vertical disparities
∗ Horizontal exploration radius: Horizontal exploration radius around the initial
disparity estimate (in pixels)
∗ Vertical exploration radius: Vertical exploration radius around the initial dispar-
ity estimate (in pixels)
5.7. Stereo 221

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_BlockMatching -io . inleft StereoFixed . png -io . inright StereoMoving . png -bm . minhd -10
-bm . maxhd 10 - mask . variancet 10 -io . out MyDisparity . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the BlockMatching application

BlockMatching = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" BlockMatching ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

BlockMatching . SetParameterString (" io . inleft " , " StereoFixed . png ")

BlockMatching . SetParameterString (" io . inright " , " StereoMoving . png ")

BlockMatching . SetParameterInt (" bm . minhd " , -10)

BlockMatching . SetParameterInt (" bm . maxhd " , 10)

BlockMatching . SetParameterFloat (" mask . variancet " , 10)

BlockMatching . SetParameterString (" io . out " , " MyDisparity . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

BlockMatching . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

222 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbStereoRectificationGridGenerator

5.7.2 Disparity map to elevation map

Projects a disparity map into a regular elevation map

Detailed description

This application uses a disparity map computed from a stereo image pair to produce an elevation
map on the ground area covered by the stereo pair. The needed inputs are : the disparity map, the
stereo pair (in original geometry) and the epipolar deformation grids. These grids have to link the
original geometry (stereo pair) and the epipolar geometry (disparity map).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.49, page 223
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is DisparityMapToElevationMap.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.in Input image Input disparity map
io.left Input image Left sensor image
io.right Input image Right sensor image
io.lgrid Input image Left Grid
io.rgrid Input image Right Grid
io.out Output image Output elevation map
io.mask Input image Disparity mask
step Float DEM step
hmin Float Minimum elevation expected
hmax Float Maximum elevation expected
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
.../...
5.7. Stereo 223

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...

Figure 5.49: Parameters table for Disparity map to elevation map.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set the input and output images and grids.

• Input disparity map: The input disparity map (horizontal disparity in first band, vertical in
second)
• Left sensor image: Left image in original (sensor) geometry
• Right sensor image: Right image in original (sensor) geometry
• Left Grid: Left epipolar grid (deformation grid between sensor et disparity spaces)
• Right Grid: Right epipolar grid (deformation grid between sensor et disparity spaces)
• Output elevation map: Output elevation map in ground projection
• Disparity mask: Masked disparity cells won’t be projected

DEM step Spacing of the output elevation map (in meters)

Minimum elevation expected Minimum elevation expected (in meters)

Maximum elevation expected Maximum elevation expected (in meters)

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
224 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_DisparityMapToElevationMap -io .in disparity . tif -io . left sensor_left . tif -io . right
sensor_right . tif -io . lgrid grid_epi_left . tif -io . rgrid grid_epi_right . tif -io . out dem . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the DisparityMapToElevationMap application

DisparityMapToElevationMap =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" DisparityMapToElevationMap ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . in " , " disparity . tif ")

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . left " , " sensor_left . tif ")

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . right " , " sensor_right . tif ")

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . lgrid " , " grid_epi_left . tif ")

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . rgrid " , " grid_epi_right . tif ")

DisparityMapToElevationMap . SetParameterString (" io . out " , " dem . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

DisparityMapToElevationMap . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None
5.7. Stereo 225

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbStereoRectificationGridGenerator otbBlockMatching

5.7.3 Fine Registration

Estimate disparity map between two images.

Detailed description

Estimate disparity map between two images. Output image contain x offset, y offset and metric
value.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.50, page 226
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is FineRegistration.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

ref Input image Reference Image
sec Input image Secondary Image
out Output image Output Image
erx Int Exploration Radius X
ery Int Exploration Radius Y
mrx Int Metric Radius X
mry Int Metric Radius Y
w Input image Image To Warp
wo Output image Output Warped Image
cox Float Coarse Offset X
coy Float Coarse Offset Y
ssrx Float Sub-Sampling Rate X
ssry Float Sub-Sampling Rate Y
rgsx Float Reference Gaussian Smoothing X
.../...
226 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
rgsy Float Reference Gaussian Smoothing Y
sgsx Float Secondary Gaussian Smoothing X
sgsy Float Secondary Gaussian Smoothing Y
m String Metric
spa Float SubPixelAccuracy
vmlt Float Validity Mask Lower Threshold
vmut Float Validity Mask Upper Threshold
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.50: Parameters table for Fine Registration.

• Reference Image: The reference image.

• Secondary Image: The secondary image.
• Output Image: The output image.
• Exploration Radius X: The exploration radius along x (in pixels)
• Exploration Radius Y: The exploration radius along y (in pixels)
• Metric Radius X: Radius along x (in pixels) of the metric computation window
• Metric Radius Y: Radius along y (in pixels) of the metric computation window
• Image To Warp: The image to warp after disparity estimation is completed
• Output Warped Image: The output warped image
• Coarse Offset X: Coarse offset along x (in physical space) between the two images
• Coarse Offset Y: Coarse offset along y (in physical space) between the two images
• Sub-Sampling Rate X: Generates a result at a coarser resolution with a given sub-sampling
rate along X
• Sub-Sampling Rate Y: Generates a result at a coarser resolution with a given sub-sampling
rate along Y
• Reference Gaussian Smoothing X: Performs a gaussian smoothing of the reference image.
Parameter is gaussian sigma (in pixels) in X direction.
5.7. Stereo 227

• Reference Gaussian Smoothing Y: Performs a gaussian smoothing of the reference image.

Parameter is gaussian sigma (in pixels) in Y direction.
• Secondary Gaussian Smoothing X: Performs a gaussian smoothing of the secondary image.
Parameter is gaussian sigma (in pixels) in X direction.
• Secondary Gaussian Smoothing Y: Performs a gaussian smoothing of the secondary image.
Parameter is gaussian sigma (in pixels) in Y direction.
• Metric: Choose the metric used for block matching. Available metrics are cross-
correlation (CC), cross-correlation with subtracted mean (CCSM), mean-square difference
(MSD), mean reciprocal square difference (MRSD) and mutual information (MI). Default is
cross-correlation
• SubPixelAccuracy: Metric extrema location will be refined up to the given accuracy. Default
is 0.01
• Validity Mask Lower Threshold: Lower threshold to obtain a validity mask.
• Validity Mask Upper Threshold: Upper threshold to obtain a validity mask.
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_FineRegistration -ref StereoFixed . png -sec StereoMoving . png -out FineRegistration . tif
-erx 2 -ery 2 -mrx 3 -mry 3

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the FineRegistration application

FineRegistration = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" FineRegistration ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

FineRegistration . SetParameterString (" ref " , " StereoFixed . png ")

FineRegistration . SetParameterString (" sec " , " StereoMoving . png ")

FineRegistration . SetParameterString (" out " , " FineRegistration . tif ")

FineRegistration . SetParameterInt (" erx " , 2)

228 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

FineRegistration . SetParameterInt (" ery " , 2)

FineRegistration . SetParameterInt (" mrx " , 3)

FineRegistration . SetParameterInt (" mry " , 3)

# The following line execute the application

FineRegistration . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.7.4 Stereo Framework

Compute the ground elevation based on one or multiple stereo pair(s)

Detailed description

Compute the ground elevation with a stereo block matching algorithm between one or mulitple
stereo pair in sensor geometry. The output is projected in desired geographic or cartographic map
projection (UTM by default). The pipeline is made of the following steps:
for each sensor pair :
- compute the epipolar displacement grids from the stereo pair (direct and inverse)
- resample the stereo pair into epipolar geometry using BCO interpolation
- create masks for each epipolar image : remove black borders and resample input masks
- compute horizontal disparities with a block matching algorithm
- refine disparities to sub-pixel precision with a dichotomy algorithm
- apply an optional median filter
- filter disparities based on the correlation score and exploration bounds
- translate disparities in sensor geometry
convert disparity to 3D Map.
Then fuse all 3D maps to produce DSM.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.51, page 230
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
5.7. Stereo 229

programming languages. Application key is StereoFramework.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

input Group Input parameters
input.il Input image list Input images list
input.co String Couples list
input.channel Int Image channel used for the block matching
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
output Group Output parameters
output.res Float Output resolution
output.nodata Float NoData value
output.fusionmethod Choices Method to fuse measures in each DSM cell
output.fusionmethod max Choice The cell is filled with the maximum mea-
sured elevation values
output.fusionmethod min Choice The cell is filled with the minimum mea-
sured elevation values
output.fusionmethod mean Choice The cell is filled with the mean of measured
elevation values
output.fusionmethod acc Choice accumulator mode. The cell is filled with
the the number of values (for debugging pur-
poses).
output.out Output image Output DSM
output.mode Choices Parameters estimation modes
output.mode fit Choice Fit to sensor image
output.mode user Choice User Defined
output.mode.user.ulx Float Upper Left X
output.mode.user.uly Float Upper Left Y
output.mode.user.sizex Int Size X
output.mode.user.sizey Int Size Y
output.mode.user.spacingx Float Pixel Size X
output.mode.user.spacingy Float Pixel Size Y
map Choices Output Cartographic Map Projection
map utm Choice Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM)
map lambert2 Choice Lambert II Etendu
map lambert93 Choice Lambert93
map wgs Choice WGS 84
map epsg Choice EPSG Code
map.utm.zone Int Zone number
map.utm.northhem Boolean Northern Hemisphere
map.epsg.code Int EPSG Code
stereorect Group Stereorectification Grid parameters
stereorect.fwdgridstep Int Step of the displacement grid (in pixels)
.../...
230 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
stereorect.invgridssrate Int Sub-sampling rate for epipolar grid inver-
sion
bm Group Block matching parameters
bm.metric Choices Block-matching metric
bm.metric ssdmean Choice Sum of Squared Distances divided by mean
of block
bm.metric ssd Choice Sum of Squared Distances
bm.metric ncc Choice Normalized Cross-Correlation
bm.metric lp Choice Lp pseudo-norm
bm.metric.lp.p Float p value
bm.radius Int Radius of blocks for matching filter (in pix-
els)
bm.minhoffset Float Minimum altitude offset (in meters)
bm.maxhoffset Float Maximum altitude offset (in meters)
postproc Group Postprocessing parameters
postproc.bij Boolean Use bijection consistency in block matching
strategy
postproc.med Boolean Use median disparities filtering
postproc.metrict Float Correlation metric threshold
mask Group Masks
mask.left Input image Input left mask
mask.right Input image Input right mask
mask.variancet Float Discard pixels with low local variance
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.51: Parameters table for Stereo Framework.

Input parameters This group of parameters allows to parametrize input data.

• Input images list: The list of images.

• Couples list: List of index of couples im image list. Couples must be separated by a comma.
(index start at 0). for example : 0 1,1 2 will process a first couple composed of the first and
the second image in image list, then the first and the third image
. note that images are handled by pairs. if left empty couples are created from input index i.e.
a first couple will be composed of the first and second image, a second couple with third and
fourth image etc. (in this case image list must be even).
5.7. Stereo 231

• Image channel used for the block matching: Used channel for block matching (used for
all images)

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Output parameters This group of parameters allows to choose the DSM resolution, nodata value,
and projection parameters.

• Output resolution: Spatial sampling distance of the output elevation : the cell size (in m)
• NoData value: DSM empty cells are filled with this value (optional -32768 by default)
• Method to fuse measures in each DSM cell: This parameter allows to choose the method
used to fuse elevation measurements in each output DSM cell
Available choices are:
– The cell is filled with the maximum measured elevation values
– The cell is filled with the minimum measured elevation values
– The cell is filled with the mean of measured elevation values
– accumulator mode. The cell is filled with the the number of values (for debugging
purposes).
• Output DSM: Output elevation image
• Parameters estimation modes:
Available choices are:
– Fit to sensor image: Fit the size, origin and spacing to an existing ortho image (uses the
value of outputs.ortho)
232 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

– User Defined: This mode allows you to fully modify default values.
∗ Upper Left X : Cartographic X coordinate of upper-left corner (meters for carto-
graphic projections, degrees for geographic ones)
∗ Upper Left Y : Cartographic Y coordinate of the upper-left corner (meters for
cartographic projections, degrees for geographic ones)
∗ Size X : Size of projected image along X (in pixels)
∗ Size Y : Size of projected image along Y (in pixels)
∗ Pixel Size X : Size of each pixel along X axis (meters for cartographic projections,
degrees for geographic ones)
∗ Pixel Size Y : Size of each pixel along Y axis (meters for cartographic projections,
degrees for geographic ones)

Output Cartographic Map Projection Parameters of the output map projection to be used. Available
choices are:

• Universal Trans-Mercator (UTM): A system of transverse mercator projections dividing the

surface of Earth between 80S and 84N latitude.
– Zone number: The zone number ranges from 1 to 60 and allows to define the transverse
mercator projection (along with the hemisphere)
– Northern Hemisphere: The transverse mercator projections are defined by their zone
number as well as the hemisphere. Activate this parameter if your image is in the north-
ern hemisphere.
• Lambert II Etendu: This is a Lambert Conformal Conic projection mainly used in France.
• Lambert93: This is a Lambert 93 projection mainly used in France.
• WGS 84: This is a Geographical projection
• EPSG Code: This code is a generic way of identifying map projections, and allows to specify
a large amount of them. See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated
to your projection;
– EPSG Code: See www.spatialreference.org to find which EPSG code is associated to
your projection

Stereorectification Grid parameters This group of parameters allows to choose direct and inverse
grid subsampling. These parameters are very useful to tune time and memory consumption.

• Step of the displacement grid (in pixels): Stereo-rectification displacement grid only varies
slowly. Therefore, it is recommended to use a coarser grid (higher step value) in case of large
images
5.7. Stereo 233

• Sub-sampling rate for epipolar grid inversion: Grid inversion is an heavy process that
implies spline regression on control points. To avoid eating to much memory, this parameter
allows to first sub-sample the field to invert.

Block matching parameters This group of parameters allow to tune the block-matching behavior

• Block-matching metric:
Available choices are:
– Sum of Squared Distances divided by mean of block: derived version of Sum of
Squared Distances between pixels value in the metric window (SSD divided by mean
over window)
– Sum of Squared Distances: Sum of squared distances between pixels value in the met-
ric window
– Normalized Cross-Correlation: Normalized Cross-Correlation between the left and
right windows
– Lp pseudo-norm: Lp pseudo-norm between the left and right windows
∗ p value: Value of the p parameter in Lp pseudo-norm (must be positive)

• Radius of blocks for matching filter (in pixels): The radius of blocks in Block-Matching
(in pixels)
• Minimum altitude offset (in meters): Minimum altitude below the selected elevation source
(in meters)

• Maximum altitude offset (in meters): Maximum altitude above the selected elevation
source (in meters)

Postprocessing parameters This group of parameters allow use optional filters.

• Use bijection consistency in block matching strategy: use bijection consistency. Right
to Left correlation is computed to validate Left to Right disparities. If bijection is not found
pixel is rejected.

• Use median disparities filtering: disparities output can be filtered using median post filter-
ing (disabled by default).
• Correlation metric threshold: Use block matching metric output to discard pixels with low
correlation value (disabled by default, float value)
234 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Masks

• Input left mask: Mask for left input image

• Input right mask: Mask for right input image
• Discard pixels with low local variance: This parameter allows to discard pixels whose local
variance is too small (the size of the neighborhood is given by the radius parameter)

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_StereoFramework - input . il sensor_stereo_left . tif sensor_stereo_right . tif - elev . default
200 - stereorect . fwdgridstep 8 - stereorect . invgridssrate 4 - postproc . med 1 - output . res
2.5 - output . out dem . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the StereoFramework application

StereoFramework = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" StereoFramework ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

StereoFramework . SetParameterStringList (" input . il " , [ ’ sensor_stereo_left . tif ’,
’ sensor_stereo_right . tif ’])

StereoFramework . SetParameterFloat (" elev . default " , 200)

StereoFramework . SetParameterInt (" stereorect . fwdgridstep " , 8)

StereoFramework . SetParameterInt (" stereorect . invgridssrate " , 4)

StereoFramework . SetParameterString (" postproc . med " ,"1")

StereoFramework . SetParameterFloat (" output . res " , 2.5)

StereoFramework . SetParameterString (" output . out " , " dem . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

StereoFramework . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()
5.7. Stereo 235

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.7.5 Stereo-rectification deformation grid generator

Generates two deformation fields to stereo-rectify (i.e. resample in epipolar geometry) a pair of
stereo images up to the sensor model precision

Detailed description

This application generates a pair of deformation grid to stereo-rectify a pair of stereo images accord-
ing to sensor modelling and a mean elevation hypothesis. The deformation grids can be passed to
the StereoRectificationGridGenerator application for actual resampling in epipolar geometry.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.52, page 236
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is StereoRectificationGridGenerator.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.inleft Input image Left input image
io.inright Input image Right input image
io.outleft Output image Left output deformation grid
io.outright Output image Right output deformation grid
epi Group Epipolar geometry and grid parameters
epi.elevation Group Elevation management
epi.elevation.dem Directory DEM directory
epi.elevation.geoid Input File name Geoid File
epi.elevation.default Float Default elevation
epi.elevation.avgdem Group Average elevation computed from DEM
epi.elevation.avgdem.step Int Sub-sampling step
epi.elevation.avgdem.value Float Average elevation value
epi.elevation.avgdem.mindisp Float Minimum disparity from DEM
epi.elevation.avgdem.maxdisp Float Maximum disparity from DEM
epi.scale Float Scale of epipolar images
epi.step Int Step of the deformation grid (in nb. of pix-
els)
epi.rectsizex Int Rectified image size X
.../...
236 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
epi.rectsizey Int Rectified image size Y
epi.baseline Float Mean baseline ratio
inverse Group Write inverse fields
inverse.outleft Output image Left inverse deformation grid
inverse.outright Output image Right inverse deformation grid
inverse.ssrate Int Sub-sampling rate for inversion
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.52: Parameters table for Stereo-rectification deformation grid generator.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set the input and output images.

• Left input image: The left input image to resample

• Right input image: The right input image to resample
• Left output deformation grid: The output deformation grid to be used to resample the left
input image
• Right output deformation grid: The output deformation grid to be used to resample the
right input image

Epipolar geometry and grid parameters Parameters of the epipolar geometry and output grids

• Elevation management: This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Sup-
ported formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a
useful tool to list/download tiles related to a product.
– DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Eleva-
tion Model tiles
– Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no
DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A
version of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-
Data/raw-file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
– Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when
there is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the
DEM tiles, and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an
average elevation value.
5.7. Stereo 237

– Average elevation computed from DEM: Average elevation computed from the pro-
vided DEM
∗ Sub-sampling step: Step of sub-sampling for average elevation estimation
∗ Average elevation value: Average elevation value estimated from DEM
∗ Minimum disparity from DEM: Disparity corresponding to estimated minimum
elevation over the left image
∗ Maximum disparity from DEM: Disparity corresponding to estimated maximum
elevation over the left image
• Scale of epipolar images: The scale parameter allows to generated zoomed-in (scale <1) or
zoomed-out (scale >1) epipolar images.
• Step of the deformation grid (in nb. of pixels): Stereo-rectification deformation grid only
varies slowly. Therefore, it is recommanded to use a coarser grid (higher step value) in case
of large images
• Rectified image size X: The application computes the optimal rectified image size so that
the whole left input image fits into the rectified area. However, due to the scale and step
parameter, this size may not match the size of the deformation field output. In this case, one
can use these output values.
• Rectified image size Y: The application computes the optimal rectified image size so that
the whole left input image fits into the rectified area. However, due to the scale and step
parameter, this size may not match the size of the deformation field output. In this case, one
can use these output values.
• Mean baseline ratio: This parameter is the mean value, in pixels.meters− 1, of the baseline
to sensor altitude ratio. It can be used to convert disparities to physical elevation, since a
disparity of one pixel will correspond to an elevation offset of the invert of this value with
respect to the mean elevation.

Write inverse fields This group of parameter allows to generate the inverse fields as well

• Left inverse deformation grid: The output deformation grid to be used to resample the
epipolar left image
• Right inverse deformation grid: The output deformation grid to be used to resample the
epipolar right image
• Sub-sampling rate for inversion: Grid inversion is an heavy process that implies spline
regression on control points. To avoid eating to much memory, this parameter allows to first
sub-sample the field to invert.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file
238 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_StereoRectificationGridGenerator -io . inleft wv2_xs_left . tif -io . inright
wv2_xs_left . tif -io . outleft wv2_xs_left_epi_field . tif -io . outright
wv2_xs_right_epi_field . tif -epi . elevation . default 400

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the StereoRectificationGridGenerator application

StereoRectificationGridGenerator =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" StereoRectificationGridGenerator ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . SetParameterString (" io . inleft " , " wv2_xs_left . tif ")

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . SetParameterString (" io . inright " , " wv2_xs_left . tif ")

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . SetParameterString (" io . outleft " , " wv2_xs_left_epi_field . tif ")

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . SetParameterString (" io . outright " ,

" wv2_xs_right_epi_field . tif ")

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . SetParameterFloat (" epi . elevation . default " , 400)

# The following line execute the application

StereoRectificationGridGenerator . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Generation of the deformation grid is not streamable, pay attention to this fact when setting the grid
step.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbGridBasedImageResampling
5.8. Learning 239

5.8 Learning

5.8.1 Classification Map Regularization

Filters the input labeled image using Majority Voting in a ball shaped neighbordhood.

Detailed description

This application filters the input labeled image (with a maximal class label = 65535) using Majority
Voting in a ball shaped neighbordhood. Majority Voting takes the more representative value of all
the pixels identified by the ball shaped structuring element and then sets the center pixel to this
majority label value.
-NoData is the label of the NOT classified pixels in the input image. These input pixels keep their
NoData label in the output image.
-Pixels with more than 1 majority class are marked as Undecided if the parameter ’ip.suvbool ==
true’, or keep their Original labels otherwise.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.53, page 239
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ClassificationMapRegularization.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output images
io.in Input image Input classification image
io.out Output image Output regularized image
ip Group Regularization parameters
ip.radius Int Structuring element radius (in pixels)
ip.suvbool Boolean Multiple majority: Undecided(X)/Original
ip.nodatalabel Int Label for the NoData class
ip.undecidedlabel Int Label for the Undecided class
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.53: Parameters table for Classification Map Regularization.

240 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Input and output images This group of parameters allows to set input and output images for clas-
sification map regularization by Majority Voting.

• Input classification image: The input labeled image to regularize.

• Output regularized image: The output regularized labeled image.

Regularization parameters This group allows to set parameters for classification map regulariza-
tion by Majority Voting.

• Structuring element radius (in pixels): The radius of the ball shaped structuring element
(expressed in pixels). By default, ’ip.radius = 1 pixel’.

• Multiple majority: Undecided(X)/Original: Pixels with more than 1 majority class are
marked as Undecided if this parameter is checked (true), or keep their Original labels other-
wise (false). Please note that the Undecided value must be different from existing labels in
the input labeled image. By default, ’ip.suvbool = false’.
• Label for the NoData class: Label for the NoData class. Such input pixels keep their
NoData label in the output image. By default, ’ip.nodatalabel = 0’.
• Label for the Undecided class: Label for the Undecided class. By default,
’ip.undecidedlabel = 0’.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ClassificationMapRegularization -io .in clLabeledImageQB123_1 . tif -io . out
clLabeledImageQB123_1_CMR_r2_nodl_10_undl_7 . tif -ip . radius 2 -ip . suvbool true
-ip . nodatalabel 10 -ip . undecidedlabel 7

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication
5.8. Learning 241

# The following line creates an instance of the ClassificationMapRegularization application

ClassificationMapRegularization =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ClassificationMapRegularization ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterString (" io . in " , " clLabeledImageQB123_1 . tif ")

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterString (" io . out " ,

" clLabeledImageQB123_1_CMR_r2_nodl_10_undl_7 . tif ")

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterInt (" ip . radius " , 2)

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterString (" ip . suvbool " ,"1")

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterInt (" ip . nodatalabel " , 10)

ClassificationMapRegularization . SetParameterInt (" ip . undecidedlabel " , 7)

# The following line execute the application

ClassificationMapRegularization . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

The input image must be a single band labeled image (with a maximal class label = 65535). The
structuring element radius must have a minimum value equal to 1 pixel. Please note that the Unde-
cided value must be different from existing labels in the input labeled image.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Documentation of the ClassificationMapRegularization application.

5.8.2 Confusion matrix Computation

Computes the confusion matrix of a classification

Detailed description

This application computes the confusion matrix of a classification map relatively to a ground truth.
This ground truth can be given as a raster or a vector data. Only reference and produced pixels with
242 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

values different from NoData are handled in the calculation of the confusion matrix. The confusion
matrix is organized the following way: rows = reference labels, columns = produced labels. In
the header of the output file, the reference and produced class labels are ordered according to the
rows/columns of the confusion matrix.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.54, page 242
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ComputeConfusionMatrix.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output File name Matrix output
ref Choices Ground truth
ref raster Choice Ground truth as a raster image
ref vector Choice Ground truth as a vector data file
ref.raster.in Input image Input reference image
ref.vector.in Input File name Input reference vector data
ref.vector.field String Field name
nodatalabel Int Value for nodata pixels
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.54: Parameters table for Confusion matrix Computation.

Input Image The input classification image.

Matrix output Filename to store the output matrix (csv format)

Ground truth Choice of ground truth format Available choices are:

• Ground truth as a raster image

– Input reference image: Input image containing the ground truth labels
• Ground truth as a vector data file
5.8. Learning 243

– Input reference vector data: Input vector data of the ground truth
– Field name: Field name containing the label values

Value for nodata pixels Label for the NoData class. Such input pixels will be discarded from the
ground truth and from the input classification map. By default, ’nodatalabel = 0’.

Available RAM (Mb) Available memory for processing (in MB)

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ComputeConfusionMatrix -in clLabeledImageQB1 . tif -out ConfusionMatrix . csv -ref vector
-ref . vector .in VectorData_QB1_bis . shp -ref . vector . field Class - nodatalabel 255

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ComputeConfusionMatrix application

ComputeConfusionMatrix = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ComputeConfusionMatrix ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterString (" in " , " clLabeledImageQB1 . tif ")

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterString (" out " , " ConfusionMatrix . csv ")

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterString (" ref " ," vector ")

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterString (" ref . vector . in " , " VectorData_QB1_bis . shp ")

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterString (" ref . vector . field " , " Class ")

ComputeConfusionMatrix . SetParameterInt (" nodatalabel " , 255)

# The following line execute the application

ComputeConfusionMatrix . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None
244 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.8.3 Compute Images second order statistics

Computes global mean and standard deviation for each band from a set of images and optionally
saves the results in an XML file.

Detailed description

This application computes a global mean and standard deviation for each band of a set of images
and optionally saves the results in an XML file. The output XML is intended to be used an input for
the TrainImagesClassifier application to normalize samples before learning.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.55, page 244
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ComputeImagesStatistics.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input images
bv Float Background Value
out Output File name Output XML file
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.55: Parameters table for Compute Images second order statistics.

• Input images: List of input images filenames.

• Background Value: Background value to ignore in statistics computation.
• Output XML file: XML filename where the statistics are saved for future reuse.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
5.8. Learning 245

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ComputeImagesStatistics -il QB_1_ortho . tif -out EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ComputeImagesStatistics application

ComputeImagesStatistics = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ComputeImagesStatistics ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ComputeImagesStatistics . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ QB_1_ortho . tif ’])

ComputeImagesStatistics . SetParameterString (" out " , " EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml ")

# The following line execute the application

ComputeImagesStatistics . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Each image of the set must contain the same bands as the others (i.e. same types, in the same order).

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Documentation of the TrainImagesClassifier application.

5.8.4 Fusion of Classifications

Fuses several classifications maps of the same image on the basis of class labels.

Detailed description

This application allows to fuse several classification maps and produces a single more robust clas-
sification map. Fusion is done either by mean of Majority Voting, or with the Dempster Shafer
246 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

combination method on class labels.

-MAJORITY VOTING: for each pixel, the class with the highest number of votes is selected.
-DEMPSTER SHAFER: for each pixel, the class label for which the Belief Function is maximal is
selected. This Belief Function is calculated by mean of the Dempster Shafer combination of Masses
of Belief, and indicates the belief that each input classification map presents for each label value.
Moreover, the Masses of Belief are based on the input confusion matrices of each classification map,
either by using the PRECISION or RECALL rates, or the OVERALL ACCURACY, or the KAPPA
coefficient. Thus, each input classification map needs to be associated with its corresponding input
confusion matrix file for the Dempster Shafer fusion.
-Input pixels with the NODATA label are not handled in the fusion of classification maps. More-
over, pixels for which all the input classifiers are set to NODATA keep this value in the output fused
image.
-In case of number of votes equality, the UNDECIDED label is attributed to the pixel.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.56, page 246
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is FusionOfClassifications.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input classifications
method Choices Fusion method
method majorityvoting Choice Majority Voting
method dempstershafer Choice Dempster Shafer combination
method.dempstershafer.cmfl Input File name list Confusion Matrices
method.dempstershafer.mob Choices Mass of belief measurement
method.dempstershafer.mob precision Choice Precision
method.dempstershafer.mob recall Choice Recall
method.dempstershafer.mob accuracy Choice Overall Accuracy
method.dempstershafer.mob kappa Choice Kappa
nodatalabel Int Label for the NoData class
undecidedlabel Int Label for the Undecided class
out Output image The output classification image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.56: Parameters table for Fusion of Classifications.

5.8. Learning 247

Input classifications List of input classification maps to fuse. Labels in each classification image
must represent the same class.

Fusion method Selection of the fusion method and its parameters. Available choices are:

• Majority Voting: Fusion of classification maps by majority voting for each output pixel.
• Dempster Shafer combination: Fusion of classification maps by the Dempster Shafer com-
bination method for each output pixel.
– Confusion Matrices: A list of confusion matrix files (*.CSV format) to define the
masses of belief and the class labels. Each file should be formatted the following way:
the first line, beginning with a ’#’ symbol, should be a list of the class labels present in the
corresponding input classification image, organized in the same order as the confusion
matrix rows/columns.
– Mass of belief measurement: Type of confusion matrix measurement used to compute
the masses of belief of each classifier.

Label for the NoData class Label for the NoData class. Such input pixels keep their NoData label
in the output image and are not handled in the fusion process. By default, ’nodatalabel = 0’.

Label for the Undecided class Label for the Undecided class. Pixels with more than 1 fused class
are marked as Undecided. Please note that the Undecided value must be different from existing
labels in the input classifications. By default, ’undecidedlabel = 0’.

The output classification image The output classification image resulting from the fusion of the
input classification images.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_FusionOfClassifications -il classification1 . tif classification2 . tif
classification3 . tif - method dempstershafer - method . dempstershafer . cmfl
classification1 . csv classification2 . csv classification3 . csv - method . dempstershafer . mob
precision - nodatalabel 0 - undecidedlabel 10 -out classification_fused . tif
248 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the FusionOfClassifications application

FusionOfClassifications = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" FusionOfClassifications ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ classification1 . tif ’,
’ classification2 . tif ’, ’ classification3 . tif ’])

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterString (" method " ," dempstershafer ")

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterString (" method . dempstershafer . mob " ," precision ")

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterInt (" nodatalabel " , 0)

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterInt (" undecidedlabel " , 10)

FusionOfClassifications . SetParameterString (" out " , " classification_fused . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

FusionOfClassifications . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• ImageClassifier application

5.8.5 Image Classification

Performs a classification of the input image according to a model file.

5.8. Learning 249

Detailed description

This application performs an image classification based on a model file produced by the TrainIm-
agesClassifier application. Pixels of the output image will contain the class labels decided by the
classifier (maximal class label = 65535). The input pixels can be optionally centered and reduced
according to the statistics file produced by the ComputeImagesStatistics application. An optional
input mask can be provided, in which case only input image pixels whose corresponding mask value
is greater than 0 will be classified. The remaining of pixels will be given the label 0 in the output
image.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.57, page 249
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ImageClassifier.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
mask Input image Input Mask
model Input File name Model file
imstat Input File name Statistics file
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.57: Parameters table for Image Classification.

• Input Image: The input image to classify.

• Input Mask: The mask allows to restrict classification of the input image to the area where
mask pixel values are greater than 0.
• Model file: A model file (produced by TrainImagesClassifier application, maximal class
label = 65535).
• Statistics file: A XML file containing mean and standard deviation to center and reduce
samples before classification (produced by ComputeImagesStatistics application).
• Output Image: Output image containing class labels
250 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_ImageClassifier -in QB_1_ortho . tif - imstat EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml - model
clsvmModelQB1 . svm -out clLabeledImageQB1 . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ImageClassifier application

ImageClassifier = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ImageClassifier ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ImageClassifier . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_1_ortho . tif ")

ImageClassifier . SetParameterString (" imstat " , " EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml ")

ImageClassifier . SetParameterString (" model " , " clsvmModelQB1 . svm ")

ImageClassifier . SetParameterString (" out " , " clLabeledImageQB1 . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

ImageClassifier . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

The input image must have the same type, order and number of bands than the images used to
produce the statistics file and the SVM model file. If a statistics file was used during training by the
TrainImagesClassifier, it is mandatory to use the same statistics file for classification. If an input
mask is used, its size must match the input image size.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

5.8. Learning 251

• TrainImagesClassifier, ValidateImagesClassifier, ComputeImagesStatistics

5.8.6 Unsupervised KMeans image classification

Unsupervised KMeans image classification

Detailed description

Performs unsupervised KMeans image classification.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.58, page 251
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is KMeansClassification.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
vm Input image Validity Mask
ts Int Training set size
nc Int Number of classes
maxit Int Maximum number of iterations
ct Float Convergence threshold
outmeans Output File name Centroid filename
rand Int set user defined seed
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.58: Parameters table for Unsupervised KMeans image classification.

• Input Image: Input image to classify.

• Output Image: Output image containing the class indexes.
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)
• Validity Mask: Validity mask. Only non-zero pixels will be used to estimate KMeans modes.
252 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Training set size: Size of the training set (in pixels).

• Number of classes: Number of modes, which will be used to generate class membership.
• Maximum number of iterations: Maximum number of iterations for the learning step.
• Convergence threshold: Convergence threshold for class centroid (L2 distance, by default
0.0001).
• Centroid filename: Output text file containing centroid positions
• set user defined seed: Set specific seed. with integer value.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_KMeansClassification -in QB_1_ortho . tif -ts 1000 -nc 5 - maxit 1000 -ct 0.0001 -out
ClassificationFilterOutput . tif

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the KMeansClassification application

KMeansClassification = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" KMeansClassification ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

KMeansClassification . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_1_ortho . tif ")

KMeansClassification . SetParameterInt (" ts " , 1000)

KMeansClassification . SetParameterInt (" nc " , 5)

KMeansClassification . SetParameterInt (" maxit " , 1000)

KMeansClassification . SetParameterFloat (" ct " , 0.0001)

KMeansClassification . SetParameterString (" out " , " ClassificationFilterOutput . tif ")

# The following line execute the application

KMeansClassification . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None
5.8. Learning 253

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.8.7 SOM Classification

SOM image classification.

Detailed description

Unsupervised Self Organizing Map image classification.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.59, page 254
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is SOMClassification.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image InputImage
out Output image OutputImage
vm Input image ValidityMask
tp Float TrainingProbability
ts Int TrainingSetSize
sl Int StreamingLines
som Output image SOM Map
sx Int SizeX
sy Int SizeY
nx Int NeighborhoodX
ny Int NeighborhoodY
ni Int NumberIteration
bi Float BetaInit
bf Float BetaFinal
iv Float InitialValue
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
rand Int set user defined seed
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
254 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Figure 5.59: Parameters table for SOM Classification.

• InputImage: Input image to classify.

• OutputImage: Output classified image (each pixel contains the index of its corresponding
vector in the SOM).
• ValidityMask: Validity mask (only pixels corresponding to a mask value greater than 0 will
be used for learning)
• TrainingProbability: Probability for a sample to be selected in the training set
• TrainingSetSize: Maximum training set size (in pixels)
• StreamingLines: Number of lines in each streaming block (used during data sampling)

• SOM Map: Output image containing the Self-Organizing Map

• SizeX: X size of the SOM map
• SizeY: Y size of the SOM map

• NeighborhoodX: X size of the initial neighborhood in the SOM map

• NeighborhoodY: Y size of the initial neighborhood in the SOM map
• NumberIteration: Number of iterations for SOM learning
• BetaInit: Initial learning coefficient

• BetaFinal: Final learning coefficient

• InitialValue: Maximum initial neuron weight
• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)

• set user defined seed: Set specific seed. with integer value.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
5.8. Learning 255

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_SOMClassification -in QB_1_ortho . tif -out SOMClassification . tif -tp 1.0 -ts 16384 -sl
32 -sx 32 -sy 32 -nx 10 -ny 10 -ni 5 -bi 1.0 -bf 0.1 -iv 0

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the SOMClassification application

SOMClassification = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" SOMClassification ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

SOMClassification . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_1_ortho . tif ")

SOMClassification . SetParameterString (" out " , " SOMClassification . tif ")

SOMClassification . SetParameterFloat (" tp " , 1.0)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" ts " , 16384)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" sl " , 32)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" sx " , 32)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" sy " , 32)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" nx " , 10)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" ny " , 10)

SOMClassification . SetParameterInt (" ni " , 5)

SOMClassification . SetParameterFloat (" bi " , 1.0)

SOMClassification . SetParameterFloat (" bf " , 0.1)

SOMClassification . SetParameterFloat (" iv " , 0)

# The following line execute the application

SOMClassification . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

256 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

5.8.8 Train a classifier from multiple images

Train a classifier from multiple pairs of images and training vector data.

Detailed description

This application performs a classifier training from multiple pairs of input images and training vec-
tor data. Samples are composed of pixel values in each band optionally centered and reduced using
an XML statistics file produced by the ComputeImagesStatistics application.
The training vector data must contain polygons with a positive integer field representing the class la-
bel. The name of this field can be set using the ”Class label field” parameter. Training and validation
sample lists are built such that each class is equally represented in both lists. One parameter allows
to control the ratio between the number of samples in training and validation sets. Two parameters
allow to manage the size of the training and validation sets per class and per image.
Several classifier parameters can be set depending on the chosen classifier. In the validation process,
the confusion matrix is organized the following way: rows = reference labels, columns = produced
labels. In the header of the optional confusion matrix output file, the validation (reference) and pre-
dicted (produced) class labels are ordered according to the rows/columns of the confusion matrix.
This application is based on LibSVM and on OpenCV Machine Learning classifiers, and is compat-
ible with OpenCV 2.3.1 and later.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.60, page 259
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is TrainImagesClassifier.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

io Group Input and output data
io.il Input image list Input Image List
io.vd Input vector data list Input Vector Data List
io.imstat Input File name Input XML image statistics file
io.confmatout Output File name Output confusion matrix
io.out Output File name Output model
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
sample Group Training and validation samples parameters
sample.mt Int Maximum training sample size per class
sample.mv Int Maximum validation sample size per class
sample.edg Boolean On edge pixel inclusion
.../...
5.8. Learning 257

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
sample.vtr Float Training and validation sample ratio
sample.vfn String Name of the discrimination field
classifier Choices Classifier to use for the training
classifier libsvm Choice LibSVM classifier
classifier svm Choice SVM classifier (OpenCV)
classifier boost Choice Boost classifier
classifier dt Choice Decision Tree classifier
classifier gbt Choice Gradient Boosted Tree classifier
classifier ann Choice Artificial Neural Network classifier
classifier bayes Choice Normal Bayes classifier
classifier rf Choice Random forests classifier
classifier knn Choice KNN classifier
classifier.libsvm.k Choices SVM Kernel Type
classifier.libsvm.k linear Choice Linear
classifier.libsvm.k rbf Choice Gaussian radial basis function
classifier.libsvm.k poly Choice Polynomial
classifier.libsvm.k sigmoid Choice Sigmoid
classifier.libsvm.c Float Cost parameter C
classifier.libsvm.opt Boolean Parameters optimization
classifier.svm.m Choices SVM Model Type
classifier.svm.m csvc Choice C support vector classification
classifier.svm.m nusvc Choice Nu support vector classification
classifier.svm.m oneclass Choice Distribution estimation (One Class SVM)
classifier.svm.k Choices SVM Kernel Type
classifier.svm.k linear Choice Linear
classifier.svm.k rbf Choice Gaussian radial basis function
classifier.svm.k poly Choice Polynomial
classifier.svm.k sigmoid Choice Sigmoid
classifier.svm.c Float Cost parameter C
classifier.svm.nu Float Parameter nu of a SVM optimization prob-
lem (NU SVC / ONE CLASS)
classifier.svm.coef0 Float Parameter coef0 of a kernel function (POLY
/ SIGMOID)
classifier.svm.gamma Float Parameter gamma of a kernel function
(POLY / RBF / SIGMOID)
classifier.svm.degree Float Parameter degree of a kernel function
(POLY)
classifier.svm.opt Boolean Parameters optimization
classifier.boost.t Choices Boost Type
classifier.boost.t discrete Choice Discrete AdaBoost
classifier.boost.t real Choice Real AdaBoost (technique using confidence-
rated predictions and working well with cat-
egorical data)
.../...
258 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
classifier.boost.t logit Choice LogitBoost (technique producing good re-
gression fits)
classifier.boost.t gentle Choice Gentle AdaBoost (technique setting less
weight on outlier data points and, for that
reason, being often good with regression
data)
classifier.boost.w Int Weak count
classifier.boost.r Float Weight Trim Rate
classifier.boost.m Int Maximum depth of the tree
classifier.dt.max Int Maximum depth of the tree
classifier.dt.min Int Minimum number of samples in each node
classifier.dt.ra Float Termination criteria for regression tree
classifier.dt.cat Int Cluster possible values of a categorical vari-
able into K <= cat clusters to find a subop-
timal split
classifier.dt.f Int K-fold cross-validations
classifier.dt.r Boolean Set Use1seRule flag to false
classifier.dt.t Boolean Set TruncatePrunedTree flag to false
classifier.gbt.w Int Number of boosting algorithm iterations
classifier.gbt.s Float Regularization parameter
classifier.gbt.p Float Portion of the whole training set used for
each algorithm iteration
classifier.gbt.max Int Maximum depth of the tree
classifier.ann.t Choices Train Method Type
classifier.ann.t reg Choice RPROP algorithm
classifier.ann.t back Choice Back-propagation algorithm
classifier.ann.sizes String list Number of neurons in each intermediate
layer
classifier.ann.f Choices Neuron activation function type
classifier.ann.f ident Choice Identity function
classifier.ann.f sig Choice Symmetrical Sigmoid function
classifier.ann.f gau Choice Gaussian function (Not completely sup-
ported)
classifier.ann.a Float Alpha parameter of the activation function
classifier.ann.b Float Beta parameter of the activation function
classifier.ann.bpdw Float Strength of the weight gradient term in the
BACKPROP method
classifier.ann.bpms Float Strength of the momentum term (the differ-
ence between weights on the 2 previous iter-
ations)
classifier.ann.rdw Float Initial value Delta 0 of update-values
Delta ij in RPROP method
classifier.ann.rdwm Float Update-values lower limit Delta min in
RPROP method
.../...
5.8. Learning 259

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
classifier.ann.term Choices Termination criteria
classifier.ann.term iter Choice Maximum number of iterations
classifier.ann.term eps Choice Epsilon
classifier.ann.term all Choice Max. iterations + Epsilon
classifier.ann.eps Float Epsilon value used in the Termination crite-
ria
classifier.ann.iter Int Maximum number of iterations used in the
Termination criteria
classifier.rf.max Int Maximum depth of the tree
classifier.rf.min Int Minimum number of samples in each node
classifier.rf.ra Float Termination Criteria for regression tree
classifier.rf.cat Int Cluster possible values of a categorical vari-
able into K <= cat clusters to find a subop-
timal split
classifier.rf.var Int Size of the randomly selected subset of fea-
tures at each tree node
classifier.rf.nbtrees Int Maximum number of trees in the forest
classifier.rf.acc Float Sufficient accuracy (OOB error)
classifier.knn.k Int Number of Neighbors
rand Int set user defined seed
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.60: Parameters table for Train a classifier from multiple images.

Input and output data This group of parameters allows to set input and output data.

• Input Image List: A list of input images.

• Input Vector Data List: A list of vector data to select the training samples.
• Input XML image statistics file: Input XML file containing the mean and the standard
deviation of the input images.

• Output confusion matrix: Output file containing the confusion matrix (.csv format).
• Output model: Output file containing the model estimated (.txt format).
260 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Training and validation samples parameters This group of parameters allows to set training and
validation sample lists parameters.

• Maximum training sample size per class: Maximum size per class (in pixels) of the training
sample list (default = 1000) (no limit = -1). If equal to -1, then the maximal size of the
available training sample list per class will be equal to the surface area of the smallest class
multiplied by the training sample ratio.
• Maximum validation sample size per class: Maximum size per class (in pixels) of the
validation sample list (default = 1000) (no limit = -1). If equal to -1, then the maximal size of
the available validation sample list per class will be equal to the surface area of the smallest
class multiplied by the validation sample ratio.
• On edge pixel inclusion: Takes pixels on polygon edge into consideration when building
training and validation samples.
• Training and validation sample ratio: Ratio between training and validation samples (0.0
= all training, 1.0 = all validation) (default = 0.5).
• Name of the discrimination field: Name of the field used to discriminate class labels in the
input vector data files.

Classifier to use for the training Choice of the classifier to use for the training. Available choices
are:

• LibSVM classifier: This group of parameters allows to set SVM classifier parameters.
– SVM Kernel Type: SVM Kernel Type.
5.8. Learning 261

– Cost parameter C: SVM models have a cost parameter C (1 by default) to control the
trade-off between training errors and forcing rigid margins.
– Parameters optimization: SVM parameters optimization flag.
• SVM classifier (OpenCV): This group of parameters allows to set SVM classifier parameters.
See complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/support_
vector_machines.html.
– SVM Model Type: Type of SVM formulation.
– SVM Kernel Type: SVM Kernel Type.
– Cost parameter C: SVM models have a cost parameter C (1 by default) to control the
trade-off between training errors and forcing rigid margins.
– Parameter nu of a SVM optimization problem (NU SVC / ONE CLASS): Param-
eter nu of a SVM optimization problem.
– Parameter coef0 of a kernel function (POLY / SIGMOID): Parameter coef0 of a
kernel function (POLY / SIGMOID).
– Parameter gamma of a kernel function (POLY / RBF / SIGMOID): Parameter
gamma of a kernel function (POLY / RBF / SIGMOID).
– Parameter degree of a kernel function (POLY): Parameter degree of a kernel function
(POLY).
– Parameters optimization: SVM parameters optimization flag.
-If set to True, then the optimal SVM parameters will be estimated. Parameters are
considered optimal by OpenCV when the cross-validation estimate of the test set error
is minimal. Finally, the SVM training process is computed 10 times with these optimal
parameters over subsets corresponding to 1/10th of the training samples using the k-fold
cross-validation (with k = 10).
-If set to False, the SVM classification process will be computed once with the currently
set input SVM parameters over the training samples.
-Thus, even with identical input SVM parameters and a similar random seed, the output
SVM models will be different according to the method used (optimized or not) because
the samples are not identically processed within OpenCV.
• Boost classifier: This group of parameters allows to set Boost classifier parameters. See com-
plete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/boosting.html.
– Boost Type: Type of Boosting algorithm.
– Weak count: The number of weak classifiers.
– Weight Trim Rate: A threshold between 0 and 1 used to save computational time.
Samples with summary weight <= (1 - weight trim rate) do not participate in the next
iteration of training. Set this parameter to 0 to turn off this functionality.
– Maximum depth of the tree: Maximum depth of the tree.
262 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Decision Tree classifier: This group of parameters allows to set Decision Tree classifier pa-
rameters. See complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/
decision_trees.html.
– Maximum depth of the tree: The training algorithm attempts to split each node while
its depth is smaller than the maximum possible depth of the tree. The actual depth may
be smaller if the other termination criteria are met, and/or if the tree is pruned.
– Minimum number of samples in each node: If all absolute differences between an
estimated value in a node and the values of the train samples in this node are smaller
than this regression accuracy parameter, then the node will not be split.
– Termination criteria for regression tree:
– Cluster possible values of a categorical variable into K <= cat clusters to find a sub-
optimal split: Cluster possible values of a categorical variable into K <= cat clusters
to find a suboptimal split.
– K-fold cross-validations: If cv folds >1, then it prunes a tree with K-fold cross-
validation where K is equal to cv folds.
– Set Use1seRule flag to false: If true, then a pruning will be harsher. This will make a
tree more compact and more resistant to the training data noise but a bit less accurate.
– Set TruncatePrunedTree flag to false: If true, then pruned branches are physically
removed from the tree.
• Gradient Boosted Tree classifier: This group of parameters allows to set Gradient Boosted
Tree classifier parameters. See complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/
modules/ml/doc/gradient_boosted_trees.html.
– Number of boosting algorithm iterations: Number ”w” of boosting algorithm itera-
tions, with w*K being the total number of trees in the GBT model, where K is the output
number of classes.
– Regularization parameter: Regularization parameter.
– Portion of the whole training set used for each algorithm iteration: Portion of the
whole training set used for each algorithm iteration. The subset is generated randomly.
– Maximum depth of the tree: The training algorithm attempts to split each node while
its depth is smaller than the maximum possible depth of the tree. The actual depth may
be smaller if the other termination criteria are met, and/or if the tree is pruned.
• Artificial Neural Network classifier: This group of parameters allows to set Artificial Neural
Network classifier parameters. See complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.
org/modules/ml/doc/neural_networks.html.
– Train Method Type: Type of training method for the multilayer perceptron (MLP)
neural network.
– Number of neurons in each intermediate layer: The number of neurons in each
intermediate layer (excluding input and output layers).
5.8. Learning 263

– Neuron activation function type: Neuron activation function.

– Alpha parameter of the activation function: Alpha parameter of the activation func-
tion (used only with sigmoid and gaussian functions).
– Beta parameter of the activation function: Beta parameter of the activation function
(used only with sigmoid and gaussian functions).
– Strength of the weight gradient term in the BACKPROP method: Strength of the
weight gradient term in the BACKPROP method. The recommended value is about 0.1.
– Strength of the momentum term (the difference between weights on the 2 previous
iterations): Strength of the momentum term (the difference between weights on the 2
previous iterations). This parameter provides some inertia to smooth the random fluctu-
ations of the weights. It can vary from 0 (the feature is disabled) to 1 and beyond. The
value 0.1 or so is good enough.
– Initial value Delta 0 of update-values Delta ij in RPROP method: Initial value
Delta 0 of update-values Delta ij in RPROP method (default = 0.1).
– Update-values lower limit Delta min in RPROP method: Update-values lower limit
Delta min in RPROP method. It must be positive (default = 1e-7).
– Termination criteria: Termination criteria.
– Epsilon value used in the Termination criteria: Epsilon value used in the Termination
criteria.
– Maximum number of iterations used in the Termination criteria: Maximum num-
ber of iterations used in the Termination criteria.
• Normal Bayes classifier: Use a Normal Bayes Classifier. See complete documentation here
http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/normal_bayes_classifier.html.
• Random forests classifier: This group of parameters allows to set Random Forests clas-
sifier parameters. See complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/modules/
ml/doc/random_trees.html.
– Maximum depth of the tree: The depth of the tree. A low value will likely underfit
and conversely a high value will likely overfit. The optimal value can be obtained using
cross validation or other suitable methods.
– Minimum number of samples in each node: If the number of samples in a node is
smaller than this parameter, then the node will not be split. A reasonable value is a small
percentage of the total data e.g. 1 percent.
– Termination Criteria for regression tree: If all absolute differences between an esti-
mated value in a node and the values of the train samples in this node are smaller than
this regression accuracy parameter, then the node will not be split.
– Cluster possible values of a categorical variable into K <= cat clusters to find a sub-
optimal split: Cluster possible values of a categorical variable into K <= cat clusters
to find a suboptimal split.
264 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

– Size of the randomly selected subset of features at each tree node: The size of the
subset of features, randomly selected at each tree node, that are used to find the best
split(s). If you set it to 0, then the size will be set to the square root of the total number
of features.
– Maximum number of trees in the forest: The maximum number of trees in the forest.
Typically, the more trees you have, the better the accuracy. However, the improvement
in accuracy generally diminishes and reaches an asymptote for a certain number of trees.
Also to keep in mind, increasing the number of trees increases the prediction time lin-
early.
– Sufficient accuracy (OOB error): Sufficient accuracy (OOB error).

• KNN classifier: This group of parameters allows to set KNN classifier parameters. See
complete documentation here http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/k_nearest_
neighbors.html.
– Number of Neighbors: The number of neighbors to use.

set user defined seed Set specific seed. with integer value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_TrainImagesClassifier -io . il QB_1_ortho . tif -io . vd VectorData_QB1 . shp -io . imstat
EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml - sample . mv 100 - sample . mt 100 - sample . vtr 0.5 - sample . edg
false - sample . vfn Class - classifier libsvm - classifier . libsvm .k linear
- classifier . libsvm .c 1 - classifier . libsvm . opt false -io . out svmModelQB1 . txt
-io . confmatout svmConfusionMatrixQB1 . csv

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the TrainImagesClassifier application

TrainImagesClassifier = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" TrainImagesClassifier ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterStringList (" io . il " , [ ’ QB_1_ortho . tif ’])

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterStringList (" io . vd " , [ ’ VectorData_QB1 . shp ’])

5.9. Segmentation 265

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" io . imstat " , " EstimateImageStatisticsQB1 . xml ")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterInt (" sample . mv " , 100)

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterInt (" sample . mt " , 100)

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterFloat (" sample . vtr " , 0.5)

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" sample . edg " ,"1")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" sample . vfn " , " Class ")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" classifier " ," libsvm ")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" classifier . libsvm .k" ," linear ")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterFloat (" classifier . libsvm .c" , 1)

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" classifier . libsvm . opt " ,"1")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" io . out " , " svmModelQB1 . txt ")

TrainImagesClassifier . SetParameterString (" io . confmatout " , " svmConfusionMatrixQB1 . csv ")

# The following line execute the application

TrainImagesClassifier . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• OpenCV documentation for machine learning http://docs.opencv.org/modules/ml/doc/ml.html

5.9 Segmentation

5.9.1 Connected Component Segmentation

Connected component segmentation and object based image filtering of the input image according
to user-defined criterions.
266 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application allows to perform a masking, connected components segmentation and object
based image filtering. First and optionally, a mask can be built based on user-defined criteri-
ons to select pixels of the image which will be segmented. Then a connected component seg-
mentation is performed with a user defined criterion to decide whether two neighbouring pixels
belong to the same segment or not. After this segmentation step, an object based image filter-
ing is applied using another user-defined criterion reasoning on segment properties, like shape
or radiometric attributes. Criterions are mathematical expressions analysed by the MuParser li-
brary (http://muparser.sourceforge.net/). For instance, expression ”((b1>80) and intensity>95)”
will merge two neighbouring pixel in a single segment if their intensity is more than 95 and their
value in the first image band is more than 80. See parameters documentation for a list of available
attributes. The output of the object based image filtering is vectorized and can be written in shapefile
or KML format. If the input image is in raw geometry, resulting polygons will be transformed to
WGS84 using sensor modelling before writing, to ensure consistency with GIS softwares. For this
purpose, a Digital Elevation Model can be provided to the application. The whole processing is done
on a per-tile basis for large images, so this application can handle images of arbitrary size.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.61, page 266
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ConnectedComponentSegmentation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
out Output vector data Output Shape
mask String Mask expression
expr String Connected Component Expression
minsize Int Minimum Object Size
obia String OBIA Expression
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.61: Parameters table for Connected Component Segmentation.

5.9. Segmentation 267

Input Image The image to segment.

Output Shape The segmentation shape.

Mask expression Mask mathematical expression (only if support image is given)

Connected Component Expression Formula used for connected component segmentation

Minimum Object Size Min object size (area in pixel)

OBIA Expression OBIA mathematical expression

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

268 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

otbcli_ConnectedComponentSegmentation -in ROI_QB_MUL_4 . tif - mask " (( b1 >80) * intensity >95) "
- expr " distance <10 " - minsize 15 - obia " SHAPE_Elongation >8 " -out
ConnectedComponentSegmentation . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ConnectedComponentSegmentation application

ConnectedComponentSegmentation =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ConnectedComponentSegmentation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterString (" in " , " ROI_QB_MUL_4 . tif ")

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterString (" mask " , " (( b1 >80) * intensity >95) ")

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterString (" expr " , " distance <10 ")

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterInt (" minsize " , 15)

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterString (" obia " , " SHAPE_Elongation >8 ")

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . SetParameterString (" out " , " ConnectedComponentSegmentation . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

ConnectedComponentSegmentation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

Due to the tiling scheme in case of large images, some segments can be arbitrarily split across
multiple tiles.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.9.2 Hoover compare segmentation

Compare two segmentations with Hoover metrics

Detailed description

This application compares a machine segmentation (MS) with a partial ground truth segmentation
(GT). The Hoover metrics are used to estimate scores for correct detection, over-segmentation,
5.9. Segmentation 269

under-segmentation and missed detection.

The application can output the overall Hoover scores along with coloredimages of the MS and
GT segmentation showing the state of each region (correct detection, over-segmentation, under-
segmentation, missed)
The Hoover metrics are described in : Hoover et al., ”An experimental comparison of range image
segmentation algorithms”, IEEE PAMI vol. 18, no. 7, July 1996.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.62, page 269
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is HooverCompareSegmentation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

ingt Input image Input ground truth
inms Input image Input machine segmentation
bg Int Background label
th Float Overlapping threshold
outgt Output image Colored ground truth output
outms Output image Colored machine segmentation output
rc Float Correct detection score
rf Float Over-segmentation score
ra Float Under-segmentation score
rm Float Missed detection score
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.62: Parameters table for Hoover compare segmentation.

• Input ground truth: A partial ground truth segmentation image.

• Input machine segmentation: A machine segmentation image.

• Background label: Label value of the background in the input segmentations
• Overlapping threshold: Overlapping threshold used to find Hoover instances.

• Colored ground truth output: The colored ground truth output image.
• Colored machine segmentation output: The colored machine segmentation output image.
270 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Correct detection score: Overall score for correct detection (RC)

• Over-segmentation score: Overall score for over segmentation (RF)
• Under-segmentation score: Overall score for under segmentation (RA)
• Missed detection score: Overall score for missed detection (RM)

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_HooverCompareSegmentation - ingt maur_GT . tif - inms maur_labelled . tif - outgt
maur_colored_GT . tif uint8

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the HooverCompareSegmentation application

HooverCompareSegmentation =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" HooverCompareSegmentation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

HooverCompareSegmentation . SetParameterString (" ingt " , " maur_GT . tif ")

HooverCompareSegmentation . SetParameterString (" inms " , " maur_labelled . tif ")

HooverCompareSegmentation . SetParameterString (" outgt " , " maur_colored_GT . tif ")

HooverCompareSegmentation . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" outgt " , 1)

# The following line execute the application

HooverCompareSegmentation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.9. Segmentation 271

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• otbHooverMatrixFilter, otbHooverInstanceFilter, otbLabelMapToAttributeImageFilter

5.9.3 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 2

Second step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow.

Detailed description

This application performs the second step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation work-
flow (LSMS). Filtered range image and spatial image should be created with the MeanShiftSmooth-
ing application, with modesearch parameter disabled. If spatial image is not set, the application will
only process the range image and spatial radius parameter will not be taken into account. This ap-
plication will produce a labeled image where neighbor pixels whose range distance is below range
radius (and optionally spatial distance below spatial radius) will be grouped together into the same
cluster. For large images one can use the nbtilesx and nbtilesy parameters for tile-wise processing,
with the guarantees of identical results. Please note that this application will generate a lot of tempo-
rary files (as many as the number of tiles), and will therefore require twice the size of the final result
in term of disk space. The cleanup option (activated by default) allows to remove all temporary file
as soon as they are not needed anymore (if cleanup is activated, tmpdir set and tmpdir does not exists
before running the application, it will be removed as well during cleanup). The tmpdir option allows
to define a directory where to write the temporary files. Please also note that the output image type
should be set to uint32 to ensure that there are enough labels available.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.63, page 272
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is LSMSSegmentation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Filtered image
inpos Input image Spatial image
out Output image Output Image
ranger Float Range radius
spatialr Float Spatial radius
minsize Int Minimum Region Size
.../...
272 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
tilesizex Int Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis)
tilesizey Int Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis)
tmpdir Directory Directory where to write temporary files
cleanup Boolean Temporary files cleaning
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.63: Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 2.

• Filtered image: The filtered image (cf. Adaptive MeanShift Smoothing application).
• Spatial image: The spatial image. Spatial input is the displacement map (output of the
Adaptive MeanShift Smoothing application).

• Output Image: The output image. The output image is the segmentation of the filtered
image. It is recommended to set the pixel type to uint32.
• Range radius: Range radius defining the radius (expressed in radiometry unit) in the multi-
spectral space.

• Spatial radius: Spatial radius of the neighborhood.

• Minimum Region Size: Minimum Region Size. If, after the segmentation, a region is of
size lower than this criterion, the region is deleted.
• Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis): Size of tiles along the X-axis.

• Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis): Size of tiles along the Y-axis.

• Directory where to write temporary files: This applications need to write temporary files
for each tile. This parameter allows choosing the path where to write those files. If disabled,
the current path will be used.

• Temporary files cleaning: If activated, the application will try to clean all temporary files it
created
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
5.9. Segmentation 273

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_LSMSSegmentation -in smooth . tif - inpos position . tif -out segmentation . tif - ranger 15
- spatialr 5 - minsize 0 - tilesizex 256 - tilesizey 256

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the LSMSSegmentation application

LSMSSegmentation = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" LSMSSegmentation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterString (" in " , " smooth . tif ")

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterString (" inpos " , " position . tif ")

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterString (" out " , " segmentation . tif ")

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterFloat (" ranger " , 15)

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterFloat (" spatialr " , 5)

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterInt (" minsize " , 0)

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterInt (" tilesizex " , 256)

LSMSSegmentation . SetParameterInt (" tilesizey " , 256)

# The following line execute the application

LSMSSegmentation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

This application is part of the Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow (LSMS) and may not
be suited for any other purpose.

Authors

This application has been written by David Youssefi.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• MeanShiftSmoothing, LSMSSmallRegionsMerging, LSMSVectorization

274 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

5.9.4 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 3 (optional)

Third (optional) step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow.

Detailed description

This application performs the third step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow
(LSMS). Given a segmentation result (label image) and the original image, it will merge regions
whose size in pixels is lower than minsize parameter with the adjacent regions with the adjacent
region with closest radiometry and acceptable size. Small regions will be processed by size: first all
regions of area, which is equal to 1 pixel will be merged with adjacent region, then all regions of
area equal to 2 pixels, until regions of area minsize. For large images one can use the nbtilesx and
nbtilesy parameters for tile-wise processing, with the guarantees of identical results.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.64, page 274
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is LSMSSmallRegionsMerging.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input image
inseg Input image Segmented image
out Output image Output Image
minsize Int Minimum Region Size
tilesizex Int Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis)
tilesizey Int Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.64: Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 3 (optional).

• Input image: The input image.

• Segmented image: The segmented image input. Segmented image input is the segmentation
of the input image.
• Output Image: The output image. The output image is the input image where the minimal
regions have been merged.
5.9. Segmentation 275

• Minimum Region Size: Minimum Region Size. If, after the segmentation, a region is of
size lower than this criterion, the region is merged with the ”nearest” region (radiometrically).
• Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis): Size of tiles along the X-axis.
• Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis): Size of tiles along the Y-axis.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_LSMSSmallRegionsMerging -in smooth . tif - inseg segmentation . tif -out merged . tif
- minsize 20 - tilesizex 256 - tilesizey 256

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the LSMSSmallRegionsMerging application

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" LSMSSmallRegionsMerging ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterString (" in " , " smooth . tif ")

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterString (" inseg " , " segmentation . tif ")

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterString (" out " , " merged . tif ")

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterInt (" minsize " , 20)

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterInt (" tilesizex " , 256)

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . SetParameterInt (" tilesizey " , 256)

# The following line execute the application

LSMSSmallRegionsMerging . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

This application is part of the Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow (LSMS) and may not
be suited for any other purpose.

Authors

This application has been written by David Youssefi.

276 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• LSMSSegmentation, LSMSVectorization, MeanShiftSmoothing

5.9.5 Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 4

Fourth step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow.

Detailed description

This application performs the fourth step of the exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation work-
flow (LSMS). Given a segmentation result (label image), that may have been processed for small
regions merging or not, it will convert it to a GIS vector file containing one polygon per segment.
Each polygon contains additional fields: mean and variance of each channels from input image (in
parameter), segmentation image label, number of pixels in the polygon. For large images one can
use the nbtilesx and nbtilesy parameters for tile-wise processing, with the guarantees of identical
results.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.65, page 276
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is LSMSVectorization.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
inseg Input image Segmented image
out Output File name Output GIS vector file
tilesizex Int Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis)
tilesizey Int Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis)
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.65: Parameters table for Exact Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation, step 4.
5.9. Segmentation 277

• Input Image: The input image.

• Segmented image: The segmented image input. Segmented image input is the segmentation
of the input image.
• Output GIS vector file: The output GIS vector file, representing the vectorized version
of the segmented image where the features of the polygons are the radiometric means and
variances.
• Size of tiles in pixel (X-axis): Size of tiles along the X-axis.
• Size of tiles in pixel (Y-axis): Size of tiles along the Y-axis.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_LSMSVectorization -in avions . tif - inseg merged . tif -out vector . shp - tilesizex 256
- tilesizey 256

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the LSMSVectorization application

LSMSVectorization = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" LSMSVectorization ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

LSMSVectorization . SetParameterString (" in " , " avions . tif ")

LSMSVectorization . SetParameterString (" inseg " , " merged . tif ")

LSMSVectorization . SetParameterString (" out " , " vector . shp ")

LSMSVectorization . SetParameterInt (" tilesizex " , 256)

LSMSVectorization . SetParameterInt (" tilesizey " , 256)

# The following line execute the application

LSMSVectorization . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

This application is part of the Large-Scale Mean-Shift segmentation workflow (LSMS) and may not
be suited for any other purpose.
278 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Authors

This application has been written by David Youssefi.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• MeanShiftSmoothing, LSMSSegmentation, LSMSSmallRegionsMerging

5.9.6 Segmentation

Performs segmentation of an image, and output either a raster or a vector file. In vector mode, large
input datasets are supported.

Detailed description

This application allows to perform various segmentation algorithms on a multispectral im-

age.Available segmentation algorithms are two different versions of Mean-Shift segmentation
algorithm (one being multi-threaded), simple pixel based connected components according to a
user-defined criterion, and watershed from the gradient of the intensity (norm of spectral bands
vector). The application has two different modes that affects the nature of its output.

In raster mode, the output of the application is a classical image of unique labels identifying
the segmented regions. The labeled output can be passed to the ColorMapping application to
render regions with contrasted colours. Please note that this mode loads the whole input image into
memory, and as such can not handle large images.

To segment large data, one can use the vector mode. In this case, the output of the applica-
tion is a vector file or database. The input image is split into tiles (whose size can be set using the
tilesize parameter), and each tile is loaded, segmented with the chosen algorithm, vectorized, and
written into the output file or database. This piece-wise behavior ensure that memory will never
get overloaded, and that images of any size can be processed. There are few more options in the
vector mode. The simplify option allows to simplify the geometry (i.e. remove nodes in polygons)
according to a user-defined tolerance. The stitch option allows to application to try to stitch together
polygons corresponding to segmented region that may have been split by the tiling scheme.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.66, page 280
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
5.9. Segmentation 279

programming languages. Application key is Segmentation.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
filter Choices Segmentation algorithm
filter meanshift Choice Mean-Shift
filter edison Choice Edison mean-shift
filter cc Choice Connected components
filter watershed Choice Watershed
filter mprofiles Choice Morphological profiles based segmentation
filter.meanshift.spatialr Int Spatial radius
filter.meanshift.ranger Float Range radius
filter.meanshift.thres Float Mode convergence threshold
filter.meanshift.maxiter Int Maximum number of iterations
filter.meanshift.minsize Int Minimum region size
filter.edison.spatialr Int Spatial radius
filter.edison.ranger Float Range radius
filter.edison.minsize Int Minimum region size
filter.edison.scale Float Scale factor
filter.cc.expr String Condition
filter.watershed.threshold Float Depth Threshold
filter.watershed.level Float Flood Level
filter.mprofiles.size Int Profile Size
filter.mprofiles.start Int Initial radius
filter.mprofiles.step Int Radius step.
filter.mprofiles.sigma Float Threshold of the final decision rule
mode Choices Processing mode
mode vector Choice Tile-based large-scale segmentation with
vector output
mode raster Choice Standard segmentation with labeled raster
output
mode.vector.out Output File name Output vector file
mode.vector.outmode Choices Writing mode for the output vector file
mode.vector.outmode ulco Choice Update output vector file, only allow to cre-
ate new layers
mode.vector.outmode ovw Choice Overwrite output vector file if existing.
mode.vector.outmode ulovw Choice Update output vector file, overwrite existing
layer
mode.vector.outmode ulu Choice Update output vector file, update existing
layer
mode.vector.inmask Input image Mask Image
mode.vector.neighbor Boolean 8-neighbor connectivity
mode.vector.stitch Boolean Stitch polygons
mode.vector.minsize Int Minimum object size
mode.vector.simplify Float Simplify polygons
mode.vector.layername String Layer name
.../...
280 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
mode.vector.fieldname String Geometry index field name
mode.vector.tilesize Int Tiles size
mode.vector.startlabel Int Starting geometry index
mode.vector.ogroptions String list OGR options for layer creation
mode.raster.out Output image Output labeled image
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.66: Parameters table for Segmentation.

Input Image The input image to segment

Segmentation algorithm Choice of segmentation algorithm (mean-shift by default) Available

choices are:

• Mean-Shift: OTB implementation of the Mean-Shift algorithm (multi-threaded).

– Spatial radius: Spatial radius of the neighborhood.
– Range radius: Range radius defining the radius (expressed in radiometry unit) in the
multispectral space.
– Mode convergence threshold: Algorithm iterative scheme will stop if mean-shift vec-
tor is below this threshold or if iteration number reached maximum number of iterations.
– Maximum number of iterations: Algorithm iterative scheme will stop if convergence
hasn’t been reached after the maximum number of iterations.
– Minimum region size: Minimum size of a region (in pixel unit) in segmentation.
Smaller clusters will be merged to the neighboring cluster with the closest radiometry.
If set to 0 no pruning is done.
• Edison mean-shift: Edison implementation of mean-shift algorithm, by its authors.

– Spatial radius: Spatial radius defining neighborhood.

– Range radius: Range radius defining the radius (expressed in radiometry unit) in the
multi-spectral space.
– Minimum region size: Minimum size of a region in segmentation. Smaller clusters
will be merged to the neighboring cluster with the closest radiometry.
5.9. Segmentation 281

– Scale factor: Scaling of the image before processing. This is useful for images with
narrow decimal ranges (like [0,1] for instance).
• Connected components: Simple pixel-based connected-components algorithm with a user-
defined connection condition.
– Condition: User defined connection condition, written as a mathematical expression.
Available variables are p(i)b(i), intensity p(i) and distance (example of expression :
distance <10 )
• Watershed: The traditional watershed algorithm. The height function is the gradient magni-
tude of the amplitude (square root of the sum of squared bands).
– Depth Threshold: Depth threshold Units in percentage of the maximum depth in the
image.
– Flood Level: flood level for generating the merge tree from the initial segmentation
(between 0 and 1)
• Morphological profiles based segmentation: Segmentation based on morphological pro-
files, as described in Martino Pesaresi and Jon Alti Benediktsson, Member, IEEE: A new ap-
proach for the morphological segmentation of high resolution satellite imagery. IEEE Trans-
actions on geoscience and remote sensing, vol. 39, NO. 2, February 2001, p. 309-320.
– Profile Size: Size of the profiles
– Initial radius: Initial radius of the structuring element (in pixels)
– Radius step.: Radius step along the profile (in pixels)
– Threshold of the final decision rule: Profiles values under the threshold will be ig-
nored.

Processing mode Choice of processing mode, either raster or large-scale. Available choices are:

• Tile-based large-scale segmentation with vector output: In this mode, the application will
output a vector file or database, and process the input image piecewise. This allows to perform
segmentation of very large images.
– Output vector file: The output vector file or database (name can be anything under-
stood by OGR)
– Writing mode for the output vector file: This allows to set the writing behaviour for
the output vector file. Please note that the actual behaviour depends on the file format.
– Mask Image: Only pixels whose mask value is strictly positive will be segmented.
– 8-neighbor connectivity: Activate 8-Neighborhood connectivity (default is 4).
– Stitch polygons: Scan polygons on each side of tiles and stitch polygons which connect
by more than one pixel.
282 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

– Minimum object size: Objects whose size is below the minimum object size (area in
pixels) will be ignored during vectorization.
– Simplify polygons: Simplify polygons according to a given tolerance (in pixel). This
option allows to reduce the size of the output file or database.
– Layer name: Name of the layer in the vector file or database (default is Layer).
– Geometry index field name: Name of the field holding the geometry index in the
output vector file or database.
– Tiles size: User defined tiles size for tile-based segmentation. Optimal tile size is
selected according to available RAM if null.
– Starting geometry index: Starting value of the geometry index field
– OGR options for layer creation: A list of layer creation options in the form
KEY=VALUE that will be passed directly to OGR without any validity checking. Op-
tions may depend on the file format, and can be found in OGR documentation.
• Standard segmentation with labeled raster output: In this mode, the application will output
a standard labeled raster. This mode can not handle large data.
– Output labeled image: The output labeled image.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Examples

Example 1 Example of use with vector mode and watershed segmentationTo run this example in
command-line, use the following:
otbcli_Segmentation -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif - mode vector - mode . vector . out
SegmentationVector . sqlite - filter watershed

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Segmentation application

Segmentation = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Segmentation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" mode " ," vector ")

5.9. Segmentation 283

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" mode . vector . out " , " SegmentationVector . sqlite ")

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" filter " ," watershed ")

# The following line execute the application

Segmentation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Example 2 Example of use with raster mode and mean-shift segmentationTo run this example in
command-line, use the following:
otbcli_Segmentation -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif - mode raster - mode . raster . out
SegmentationRaster . tif uint16 - filter meanshift

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the Segmentation application

Segmentation = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" Segmentation ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_PAN . tif ")

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" mode " ," raster ")

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" mode . raster . out " , " SegmentationRaster . tif ")
Segmentation . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" mode . raster . out " , 3)

Segmentation . SetParameterString (" filter " ," meanshift ")

# The following line execute the application

Segmentation . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

In raster mode, the application can not handle large input images. Stitching step of vector mode
might become slow with very large input images.
MeanShift filter results depends on the number of threads used.
Watershed and multiscale geodesic morphology segmentation will be performed on the amplitude
of the input image.

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

284 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• MeanShiftSegmentation

5.10 Miscellanous

5.10.1 Band Math

Perform a mathematical operation on monoband images

Detailed description

This application performs a mathematical operation on monoband images. Mathematical formula

interpretation is done via MuParser libraries http://muparser.sourceforge.net/

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.67, page 284
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is BandMath.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

il Input image list Input image list
out Output image Output Image
ram Int Available RAM (Mb)
exp String Expression
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.67: Parameters table for Band Math.

• Input image list: Image list to perform computation on.

• Output Image: Output image.
5.10. Miscellanous 285

• Available RAM (Mb): Available memory for processing (in MB)

• Expression: The mathematical expression to apply.
Use im1b1 for the first band, im1b2 for the second one...
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file

• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_BandMath -il verySmallFSATSW_r . tif verySmallFSATSW_nir . tif verySmallFSATSW . tif -out
apTvUtBandMathOutput . tif -exp " cos ( im1b1 )+ im2b1 * im3b1 - im3b2 + ndvi ( im3b3 , im3b4 )"

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the BandMath application

BandMath = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" BandMath ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

BandMath . SetParameterStringList (" il " , [ ’ verySmallFSATSW_r . tif ’, ’ verySmallFSATSW_nir . tif ’,
’ verySmallFSATSW . tif ’])

BandMath . SetParameterString (" out " , " apTvUtBandMathOutput . tif ")

BandMath . SetParameterString (" exp " , " cos ( im1b1 )+ im2b1 * im3b1 - im3b2 + ndvi ( im3b3 , im3b4 )")

# The following line execute the application

BandMath . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.10.2 Images comparaison

Estimator between 2 images.

286 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Detailed description

This application computes MSE (Mean Squared Error), MAE (Mean Absolute Error) and PSNR
(Peak Signal to Noise Ratio) between the channel of two images (reference and measurement). The
user has to set the used channel and can specify a ROI.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.68, page 286
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is CompareImages.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

ref Group Reference image properties
ref.in Input image Reference image
ref.channel Int Reference image channel
meas Group Measured image properties
meas.in Input image Measured image
meas.channel Int Measured image channel
roi Group Region Of Interest (relative to reference im-
age)
roi.startx Int Start X
roi.starty Int Start Y
roi.sizex Int Size X
roi.sizey Int Size Y
mse Float MSE
mae Float MAE
psnr Float PSNR
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.68: Parameters table for Images comparaison.

Reference image properties

• Reference image: Image used as reference in the comparison

• Reference image channel: Used channel for the reference image
5.10. Miscellanous 287

Measured image properties

• Measured image: Image used as measured in the comparison

• Measured image channel: Used channel for the measured image

Region Of Interest (relative to reference image)

• Start X: ROI start x position.

• Start Y: ROI start y position.
• Size X: Size along x in pixels.

• Size Y: Size along y in pixels.

MSE Mean Squared Error value

MAE Mean Absolute Error value

PSNR Peak Signal to Noise Ratio value

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_CompareImages -ref .in GomaApres . png -ref . channel 1 - meas .in GomaAvant . png
- meas . channel 2 -roi . startx 20 -roi . starty 30 -roi . sizex 150 -roi . sizey 200

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the CompareImages application

CompareImages = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" CompareImages ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

288 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

CompareImages . SetParameterString (" ref . in " , " GomaApres . png ")

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" ref . channel " , 1)

CompareImages . SetParameterString (" meas . in " , " GomaAvant . png ")

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" meas . channel " , 2)

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" roi . startx " , 20)

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" roi . starty " , 30)

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" roi . sizex " , 150)

CompareImages . SetParameterInt (" roi . sizey " , 200)

# The following line execute the application

CompareImages . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• BandMath application, ImageStatistics

5.10.3 Hyperspectral data unmixing

Estimate abundance maps from an hyperspectral image and a set of endmembers.

Detailed description

The application applies a linear unmixing algorithm to an hyperspectral data cube. This method
supposes that the mixture between materials in the scene is macroscopic and simulates a linear
mixing model of spectra.
The Linear Mixing Model (LMM) acknowledges that reflectance spectrum associated with each
pixel is a linear combination of pure materials in the recovery area, commonly known as endmem-
bers. Endmembers can be estimated using the VertexComponentAnalysis application.
5.10. Miscellanous 289

The application allows to estimate the abundance maps with several algorithms : Unconstrained
Least Square (ucls), Fully Constrained Least Square (fcls), Image Space Reconstruction Algorithm
(isra) and Non-negative constrained Least Square (ncls) and Minimum Dispertion Constrained Non
Negative Matrix Factorization (MDMDNMF).

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.69, page 289
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is HyperspectralUnmixing.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image Filename
out Output image Output Image
ie Input image Input endmembers
ua Choices Unmixing algorithm
ua ucls Choice UCLS
ua ncls Choice NCLS
ua isra Choice ISRA
ua mdmdnmf Choice MDMDNMF
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.69: Parameters table for Hyperspectral data unmixing.

• Input Image Filename: The hyperspectral data cube to unmix

• Output Image: The output abundance map

• Input endmembers: The endmembers (estimated pure pixels) to use for unmixing. Must be
stored as a multispectral image, where each pixel is interpreted as an endmember
• Unmixing algorithm: The algorithm to use for unmixing Available choices are:

– UCLS: Unconstrained Least Square

– NCLS: Non-negative constrained Least Square
– ISRA: Image Space Reconstruction Algorithm
– MDMDNMF: Minimum Dispertion Constrained Non Negative Matrix Factorization
290 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_HyperspectralUnmixing -in cupriteSubHsi . tif -ie cupriteEndmembers . tif -out
HyperspectralUnmixing . tif double -ua ucls

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the HyperspectralUnmixing application

HyperspectralUnmixing = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" HyperspectralUnmixing ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

HyperspectralUnmixing . SetParameterString (" in " , " cupriteSubHsi . tif ")

HyperspectralUnmixing . SetParameterString (" ie " , " cupriteEndmembers . tif ")

HyperspectralUnmixing . SetParameterString (" out " , " HyperspectralUnmixing . tif ")

HyperspectralUnmixing . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" out " , 7)

HyperspectralUnmixing . SetParameterString (" ua " ," ucls ")

# The following line execute the application

HyperspectralUnmixing . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• VertexComponentAnalysis
5.10. Miscellanous 291

5.10.4 Image to KMZ Export

Export the input image in a KMZ product.

Detailed description

This application exports the input image in a kmz product that can be display in the Google Earth
software. The user can set the size of the product size, a logo and a legend to the product. Furthe-
more, to obtain a product that fits the relief, a DEM can be used.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.70, page 291
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is KmzExport.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input image
out Output File name Output .kmz product
tilesize Int Tile Size
logo Input image Image logo
legend Input image Image legend
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.70: Parameters table for Image to KMZ Export.

Input image Input image

Output .kmz product Output Kmz product directory (with .kmz extension)

Tile Size Size of the tiles in the kmz product, in number of pixels (default = 512).
292 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Image logo Path to the image logo to add to the KMZ product.

Image legend Path to the image legend to add to the KMZ product.

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles
• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_KmzExport -in qb_RoadExtract2 . tif -out otbKmzExport . kmz - logo otb_big . png

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the KmzExport application

KmzExport = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" KmzExport ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

KmzExport . SetParameterString (" in " , " qb_RoadExtract2 . tif ")

KmzExport . SetParameterString (" out " , " otbKmzExport . kmz ")

5.10. Miscellanous 293

KmzExport . SetParameterString (" logo " , " otb_big . png ")

# The following line execute the application

KmzExport . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Conversion

5.10.5 Open Street Map layers importations applications

Generate a vector data from OSM on the input image extend

Detailed description

Generate a vector data from Open Street Map data. A DEM could be use. By default, the entire
layer is downloaded, an image can be use as support for the OSM data. The application can provide
also available classes in layers . This application required an Internet access. Informations about the
OSM project : http://www.openstreetmap.fr/

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.71, page 294
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is OSMDownloader.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
294 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

.../...
out Output vector data Output vector data
support Input image Support image
key String OSM tag key
value String OSM tag value
elev Group Elevation management
elev.dem Directory DEM directory
elev.geoid Input File name Geoid File
elev.default Float Default elevation
printclasses Boolean option to display available key/value classes
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.71: Parameters table for Open Street Map layers importations applications.

Output vector data Generated output vector data path

Support image Image used as support to estimate the models

OSM tag key OSM tag key to extract (highway, building...)

OSM tag value OSM tag value to extract (motorway, footway...)

Elevation management This group of parameters allows to manage elevation values. Supported
formats are SRTM, DTED or any geotiff. DownloadSRTMTiles application could be a useful tool
to list/download tiles related to a product.

• DEM directory: This parameter allows to select a directory containing Digital Elevation
Model tiles

• Geoid File: Use a geoid grid to get the height above the ellipsoid in case there is no DEM
available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles. A version
of the geoid can be found on the OTB website (http://hg.orfeo-toolbox.org/OTB-Data/raw-
file/404aa6e4b3e0/Input/DEM/egm96.grd).
• Default elevation: This parameter allows to set the default height above ellipsoid when there
is no DEM available, no coverage for some points or pixels with no data in the DEM tiles,
5.10. Miscellanous 295

and no geoid file has been set. This is also used by some application as an average elevation
value.

Print the key/value classes available for the bounding

option to display available key/value classes
box of the input image
** If not used : Note that the options OSMKey (-key) and Output (-out) become mandatory

Load otb application from xml file Load otb application from xml file

Save otb application to xml file Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_OSMDownloader - support qb_RoadExtract . tif -key highway -out apTvUtOSMDownloader . shp

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the OSMDownloader application

OSMDownloader = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" OSMDownloader ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

OSMDownloader . SetParameterString (" support " , " qb_RoadExtract . tif ")

OSMDownloader . SetParameterString (" key " , " highway ")

OSMDownloader . SetParameterString (" out " , " apTvUtOSMDownloader . shp ")

# The following line execute the application

OSMDownloader . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

296 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

See also

These additional ressources can be useful for further information:

• Convertion

5.10.6 Obtain UTM Zone From Geo Point

UTM zone determination from a geographic point.

Detailed description

This application returns the UTM zone of an input geographic point.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.72, page 296
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

lat Float Latitude
lon Float Longitude
utm Int UTMZone
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.72: Parameters table for Obtain UTM Zone From Geo Point.

• Latitude: Latitude value of desired point.

• Longitude: Longitude value of desired point.

• UTMZone: UTM Zone
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file

• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file
5.10. Miscellanous 297

Example

Obtain a UTM Zone To run this example in command-line, use the following:
otbcli_ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint -lat 10.0 -lon 124.0

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint application

ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint =
otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" lat " , 10.0)

ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint . SetParameterFloat (" lon " , 124.0)

# The following line execute the application

ObtainUTMZoneFromGeoPoint . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.10.7 Pixel Value

Get the value of a pixel.

Detailed description

Get the value of a pixel.

Pay attention, index starts at 0.

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.73, page 298
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
298 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

programming languages. Application key is PixelValue.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
coordx Int Col index
coordy Int Line index
cl List Channels
value String Pixel Value
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file

Figure 5.73: Parameters table for Pixel Value.

• Input Image: Input image

• Col index: Column index of the wanted pixel (starts at 0).
• Line index: Line index of the wanted pixel (starts at 0).
• Channels: Displayed channels
• Pixel Value: Pixel radiometric value
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_PixelValue -in QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif - coordx 50 - coordy 100 -cl Channel1

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the PixelValue application

PixelValue = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" PixelValue ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

PixelValue . SetParameterString (" in " , " QB_Toulouse_Ortho_XS . tif ")
5.10. Miscellanous 299

PixelValue . SetParameterInt (" coordx " , 50)

PixelValue . SetParameterInt (" coordy " , 100)

# The following line execute the application

PixelValue . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.

5.10.8 Vertex Component Analysis

Find endmembers in hyperspectral images with Vertex Component Analysis

Detailed description

Applies the Vertex Component Analysis to an hyperspectral image to extract endmembers

Parameters

This section describes in details the parameters available for this application. Table 5.74, page 300
presents a summary of these parameters and the parameters keys to be used in command-line and
programming languages. Application key is VertexComponentAnalysis.

Parameter key Parameter type Parameter description

in Input image Input Image
ne Int Number of endmembers
outendm Output image Output Endmembers
rand Int set user defined seed
inxml XML input parameters file Load otb application from xml file
outxml XML output parameters file Save otb application to xml file
300 Chapter 5. Applications Reference Documentation

Figure 5.74: Parameters table for Vertex Component Analysis.

• Input Image: Input hyperspectral data cube

• Number of endmembers: The number of endmembers to extract from the data cube
• Output Endmembers: The endmebers, stored in a one-line multi-spectral image, each pixel
representing an endmember
• set user defined seed: Set specific seed. with integer value.
• Load otb application from xml file: Load otb application from xml file
• Save otb application to xml file: Save otb application to xml file

Example

To run this example in command-line, use the following:

otbcli_VertexComponentAnalysis -in cupriteSubHsi . tif -ne 5 - outendm
VertexComponentAnalysis . tif double

To run this example from Python, use the following code snippet:
#!/usr/bin/python

# Import the otb applications package

import otbApplication

# The following line creates an instance of the VertexComponentAnalysis application

VertexComponentAnalysis = otbApplication . Registry . CreateApplication (" VertexComponentAnalysis ")

# The following lines set all the application parameters:

VertexComponentAnalysis . SetParameterString (" in " , " cupriteSubHsi . tif ")

VertexComponentAnalysis . SetParameterInt (" ne " , 5)

VertexComponentAnalysis . SetParameterString (" outendm " , " VertexComponentAnalysis . tif ")

VertexComponentAnalysis . SetParameterOutputImagePixelType (" outendm " , 7)

# The following line execute the application

VertexComponentAnalysis . ExecuteAndWriteOutput ()

Limitations

None

Authors

This application has been written by OTB-Team.